Electrical equipment
BATTERY - HEADLIGHTS
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTING
ENGINE IMMOBILISER
INSTRUMENT PANEL
SIGNALLING CONTROLS
WIPERS
RADIO
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENT
WIRING
BG0A - BG0B - BG0D - BG0G - KG0A - KG0B - KG0D - KG0G
77 11 297 482
"The repair methods given by the manufacturer in this document are based on the technical specifications current when it was prepared.
The methods may be modified as a result of changes introduced by the manufacturer in the production of the various component units and accessories from which his vehicles are constructed."
FEBRUARY 2001
All copyrights reserved by Renault.
EDITION ANGLAISE
Copying or translating, in part or in full, of this document or use of the service part reference numbering system is forbidden without the prior written authority of Renault.
© RENAULT 2001
Electrical equipment
Contents
Page
80
81
82
83
BATTERY - HEADLIGHTS
BatterySpecial features 80-1HeadlightsRemove - Refit 80-4Fixing brackets 80-5Bulbs 80-6Running lights 80-7Beam adjustment 80-8Fog lights 80-10Headlights with xenon bulbs 80-11
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Rear lights 81-1Stop lights 81-3Interior lighting 81-4Under-dashboard light 81-6Door sill light 81-7Glove compartment light 81-8Courtesy light 81-9Relay/fuse box 81-10
IMMOBILISER
RENAULT Card 82-1RENAULT Card reader 82-10Electric steering column lock 82-11Horn 82-13Alarm 82-14
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Dashboard 83-1Instrument panel 83-9Bottom of the range instrument panel 83-11Top of the range instrument panel 83-17Service warning light 83-19Display 83-20
ContentsPage
84
Fuel level sensor 83-22Oil level sensor 83-23Voice synthesiser 83-24Cruise control / speed limiter 83-30Carminat navigation aid 83-39Carminat navigation aid: Central Communication Unit 83-41Carminat navigation aid: computer 83-44Carminat navigation aid: screen 83-46Carminat navigation aid: aerial 83-48Carminat navigation system: Re-locating/change of language 83-49Carminat navigation aid: fault finding 83-50
CONTROLS - SIGNALS
Rotary switch 84-1Wiper stalk 84-3Lighting stalk 84-4Radio control satellite 84-5Rain sensor 84-6Renault Card reader 84-7Electric steering column lock 84-8Engine start/stop button 84-9Cruise control switches / Voice synthesiser 84-10Lighting dimmer 84-11Hazard warning light switches 84-12Central door locking switch 84-13Electric window switches 84-14Childproof lock switch 84-22Electric sunroof switch 84-23Rear screen and heated windscreen switches 84-24Door open sensor 84-25Door locks 84-26Tailgate switch 84-27Rear-view mirror control 84-28Electric rear-view mirrors 84-29Interior rear-view mirror 84-30Heated rear screen 84-31Electric heated windscreen 84-33Exterior temperature sensor 84-34
ContentsPage
85
86
87
WIPERS
Windscreen wipers 85-1Rear screen wiper 85-7Opening rear screen wiper mechanism 85-10Screen wash 85-13Headlight wash 85-14
RADIO
Radio 86-1Aerial 86-6
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENT
UCH 87-1Programming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87-9UCH configuration 87-12Tyre pressure monitoring system 87-15Keyless vehicle: Renault Card 87-21Keyless vehicle: standard RENAULT Card 87-24Keyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87-26Keyless vehicle: Side repeaters 87-29Keyless vehicle: RENAULT Card reader 87-30Keyless vehicle: Start/stop button 87-31Keyless vehicle: Electric steering column lock 87-33Keyless vehicle: Open sensors 87-34Keyless vehicle: Hands-free aerial 87-35Keyless vehicle: Reallocating the RENAULT Card 87-36Keyless vehicle: Defect mode 87-38Keyless vehicle: Diagram 87-39Electric windows 87-41
ContentsPage
88
Electric sunroof 87-53Driver's seat position memory 87-57Parking assistance 87-65
WIRING
Multiplexing 88-1Air bags and seat belt pretensioners 88-5Automatic seat connector 88-36
Headlining connector 88-37
BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80
80-1
180 BATTERYSpecial notes
REMOVAL
Before disconnecting the battery, insert the Renault Card into the reader until the ignition is switched on. Withdraw the card to the auxiliaries position and the electric steering lock will then be unlocked.
Disconnect the battery starting with the negative terminal.
To remove the battery, remove the covers and undo the mounting (A).
NOTE: locking the air bag computer also unlocks the electric steering column lock.
REFITTING
When refitting the battery and every time it is disconnected, a certain number of simple programming operations, which do not require the diagnostic tool, will have to be carried out for the vehicle to work correctly:! setting the time on the clock,! entering the four figure radio code (using the remote
controls at the steering wheel),! initialising the one touch electric window motors,
– close the windows completely,– the windows move jerkily to the upper limit,– keep the buttons pressed for a few seconds,– lower the windows to the lower limit,– keep the buttons pressed for a few seconds,– the motors are initialised,
! initialising the electric sunroof motor,– position the sunroof switch to the maximum tilt
position,– press and hold the switch. After two seconds, the
sunroof tilts to the maximum position in steps then falls back by a few centimetres,
– release the switch,– press the switch again within five seconds,– keep the switch pressed; the sunroof opens then
closes in the slide position,– the motor is initialised,– position the switch to off.
18703
BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80
80-2
A - CHECKING
Check and ensure that:
! the battery tray and cover are not cracked or split,
! the top of the battery is clean,
! the terminals are in good condition.
It is vital:
! to ensure that there is no sulphur deposits on the terminals,
! to clean and grease the terminals if necessary,
! to check that the nuts are correctly tightened on the terminals. Incorrect contact could cause starting faults or charging faults which could cause sparks, making the battery liable to explode,
! to check the electrolyte level.
Batteries with sets of removable plugs:
! remove the cover by hand or by using a tool (stiff spatula),
! check that the electrolyte level in all compartments is above the dividers (approximately 1.5 centimetres),
! if necessary, use demineralised water to top up the level.
Note: certain types of battery have translucent bodies which allow the level of the electrolyte to be seen.
Never add electrolyte, acid or other products.
BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80BATTERYSpecial notes 80
80-3
B - PRECAUTIONS
It should be remembered that a battery:
! contains sulphuric acid, which is a dangerous product,
! produces oxygen and hydrogen during charging. The mixture of these two gases is a detonating gas, hence the risk of an explosion.
1) DANGER = ACID
The sulphuric acid solution is a highly aggressive, toxic and corrosive product. It attacks skin, clothing, concrete and corrodes most metals.
It is also very important, when handling a battery, to take the following precautions:
! protect your eyes with goggles,
! wear anti-acid gloves and clothing.
2) DANGER = RISK OF EXPLOSION
When a battery is charging (either in a vehicle or elsewhere), oxygen and hydrogen are produced. Gas production is at a maximum when the battery is completely charged and the quantity of gas produced is proportional to the intensity of the charging current.
The oxygen and the hydrogen mix in the open air, on the surface of the plates and form a detonating mixture. This mixture is highly explosive.
The smallest of sparks, a cigarette or a recently extinguished match are sufficient to cause an explosion. The explosion is so strong that the battery can shatter and spray the acid into the surrounding atmosphere. People nearby are at risk (shattered casing parts, acid splashes). Acid splashes are harmful to the eyes, face and hands. They also attack clothing.
! Check that the consumers are switched off, before disconnecting or reconnecting a battery.
! When a battery is being charged in a room, switch off the charger before connecting or disconnecting the battery.
! Do not put any metallic items onto the battery so as not to cause a short circuit across the terminals.
! Never place a naked flame, a welding torch, hot air gun, a cigarette or a lighted match near to a battery.
If acid splashes on to your clothing, rinse all the contaminated areas thoroughly in water. If your eyes are affected, consult a doctor.
Safeguarding against the danger of explosion, which can be caused by a poorly handled battery, must be taken very seriously. Avoid all risks of sparks.
HEADLIGHTSRemoval - Refitting 80HEADLIGHTSRemoval - Refitting 80HEADLIGHTSRemoval - Refitting 80HEADLIGHTSRemoval - Refitting 80HEADLIGHTSRemoval - Refitting 80HEADLIGHTSRemoval - Refitting 80HEADLIGHTSRemoval - Refitting 80HEADLIGHTSRemoval - Refitting 80HEADLIGHTSRemoval - Refitting 80
80-4
HEADLIGHTSRemoval - Refitting
REMOVING/REFITTING THE FRONT LENS UNITS (all types)
Remove the style covers.
Disconnect the battery and the lens unit connectors.
Features of headlights with xenon bulbs (refer to the xenon headlights section)
WARNING: Xenon bulbs operate at a voltage of 20000 volts when switched on, then 85 volts A.C. when operating.It is therefore essential to disconnect the lens unit and wait for the computer (ballast) to cool down before removal.It is forbidden to light the bulb if it is not in the lens unit (dangerous to the eyes).
Remove:! the engine undertray.! the radiator grille,! the front bumper (refer to the bodywork section),! the two upper guides (A) of the bumper.
Remove the bolts (C).
Release the clip (B) from each lens unit.
Remove the lens unit.
IMPORTANT: lens unit must be adjusted after refitting:! park the vehicle on level ground,! ensure that the vehicle is empty with a full tank if
possible,! set the adjustment control to 0,! turn screw (D) to adjust the height,! turn screw (E) to adjust the direction.
If the vehicle has xenon headlights, the system must be initialised and the headlights adjusted (refer to the headlights with xenon bulbs, system initialisation section).
18855
18456
HEADLIGHTSFixing brackets 80HEADLIGHTSFixing brackets 80HEADLIGHTSFixing brackets 80HEADLIGHTSFixing brackets 80HEADLIGHTSFixing brackets 80HEADLIGHTSFixing brackets 80HEADLIGHTSFixing brackets 80HEADLIGHTSFixing brackets 80HEADLIGHTSFixing brackets 80
80-5
Fixing brackets
The light fixing brackets can be repaired using a spare parts kit, provided that no parts are missing but are simply cracked.
DETAILED PROCEDURE
repair kit part numbers:– right hand lens unit fixing brackets (77 01 206 873)– left hand lens unit fixing brackets (77 01 206 872)
Upper fixing brackets
Lower fixing bracket
Position the repair bracket, drill and rivet it with a 5 × 11 pop rivet.
18867
18856
HEADLIGHTSBulbs 80HEADLIGHTSBulbs 80HEADLIGHTSBulbs 80HEADLIGHTSBulbs 80HEADLIGHTSBulbs 80HEADLIGHTSBulbs 80HEADLIGHTSBulbs 80HEADLIGHTSBulbs 80HEADLIGHTSBulbs 80
80-6
Bulbs
REPLACING BULBS
Main beam bulbsThe bulb can be replaced once the plastic cover has been removed (1).
NOTE: approved H1 bulbs only should be used to replace main beam bulbs.
Side light and dipped beam bulbsThe bulbs can be replaced after having removed the plastic cover (2). Use approved W5W bulbs for the side lights and H7 bulbs for the dipped beam.
NOTE: for information on replacing the bulbs in xenon headlights, refer to the Xenon headlights section.
Indicator bulb: use approved PY 21W bulbs.
18856
HEADLIGHTSDaytime running lights 80HEADLIGHTSDaytime running lights 80HEADLIGHTSDaytime running lights 80HEADLIGHTSDaytime running lights 80HEADLIGHTSDaytime running lights 80HEADLIGHTSDaytime running lights 80HEADLIGHTSDaytime running lights 80HEADLIGHTSDaytime running lights 80HEADLIGHTSDaytime running lights 80
80-7
Daytime running lights
FEATURES OF DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
The daytime running lights function for some countries is operated by the UCH.
In addition, the relay/fuse box contains specific shunts to supply the lighting stalk.
To activate or deactivate this function:! fit the shunts (A):
– operating without daytime running lights: shunt fitted
– operating with daytime running lights: shunt not fitted
! configure the UCH using the diagnostic tool and the Command, System configuration menu, then select with or without daytime running lights (refer to section 87).
! fit the relays on the Option relay/fuse box (depending on vehicle, check wiring).
To fit the running lights relays:
– remove the inner cover of the glovebox secured by a bolt,
– fit the two special relays on the brackets (B). Check that the wiring is present and refer to the corresponding wiring diagram.
18321
18321
18321
HEADLIGHTSBeam adjustment 80HEADLIGHTSBeam adjustment 80HEADLIGHTSBeam adjustment 80HEADLIGHTSBeam adjustment 80HEADLIGHTSBeam adjustment 80HEADLIGHTSBeam adjustment 80HEADLIGHTSBeam adjustment 80HEADLIGHTSBeam adjustment 80HEADLIGHTSBeam adjustment 80
80-8
Beam adjustment
REMOVING/REFITTING THE CONTROL UNIT (2)
Open the fuse cover to allow access to press the lugs (1).Unclip the control unit support.
Disconnect the connector, then release the control from the support plate.
18832
18848
HEADLIGHTSBeam adjustment 80HEADLIGHTSBeam adjustment 80HEADLIGHTSBeam adjustment 80HEADLIGHTSBeam adjustment 80HEADLIGHTSBeam adjustment 80HEADLIGHTSBeam adjustment 80HEADLIGHTSBeam adjustment 80HEADLIGHTSBeam adjustment 80HEADLIGHTSBeam adjustment 80
80-9
REMOVING THE ACTUATOR
Disconnect the connector from the beam and headlight adjustment actuator.
Tighten the adjusting screw (six turns maximum).
Turn the actuator through an eighth of a turn towards the outside then release it from the lens unit.
Disconnect the ball joint from the parabola, tilting the actuator slightly.
NOTE: the headlight does not have to be removed to remove the actuator.
NOTE: for information on replacing the bulbs in xenon headlights, refer to the Xenon headlights section.
REFITTING
When fitting a new part, tighten the actuator adjusting bolt by around six turns.
Keep the parabola towards the rear of the lens unit, pulling on the bulb base.
Click the ball joint (1) into the headlight clip (2).
Position the actuator on the lens unit.
Turn the actuator through an eighth of a turn towards the inside then insert it into the lens unit.
Reconnect the connector and fit the sealed covers.
Slacken the adjusting screw (six turns).
Adjust the headlights.
18934
18934
HEADLIGHTSFront fog lights 80HEADLIGHTSFront fog lights 80HEADLIGHTSFront fog lights 80HEADLIGHTSFront fog lights 80HEADLIGHTSFront fog lights 80HEADLIGHTSFront fog lights 80HEADLIGHTSFront fog lights 80HEADLIGHTSFront fog lights 80HEADLIGHTSFront fog lights 80
80-10
Front fog lights
REMOVAL
Remove:– the radiator grille,– the engine undertray,– the front bumper,
Remove the mounting bolts (B).
NOTE: the front bumper does not have to be removed to remove the front left hand fog light.
REFITTING
There are no specific points, however remember to adjust both fog lights using screw (A).
18972
15898R
HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80
80-11
Headlights with xenon bulbs
INTRODUCTION
1. actuator2. sensor/computer3. rear sensor
HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80
80-12
GENERAL
According to the European standard, these vehicles must be fitted with headlight washers and a system which automatically adjusts the height of the headlights depending on vehicle ride height.
WARNING: it is forbidden to fit a headlight with a discharge bulb to a version not designed for this device.
Xenon bulbs:These bulbs have no filament.The light from these bulbs is generated by two electrodes in a quartz bulb which contains high pressure gas (xenon).The electronic module, or ballast, incorporated into the headlight is supplied by the vehicle's battery (12 volts) and generates a controlled voltage of 20 000 volts upon switch-on then an alternating voltage of 85 volts during operation.
Automatic headlight beam correction as a function of vehicle ride height:The automatic correction system is intended to allow (when the vehicle's load changes) a constant beam height to be maintained in relation to the initial adjustment set in the factory or by the after-sales network.Fault finding operations are possible on this system using the diagnostic tools.Every time a fault is erased, the actuators move downwards.
DESCRIPTION
The system comprises:! two lens units fitted with a normal side light bulb (A),
an H1 type main beam bulb (B), a D2R type Xenon dipped beam bulb (C) and an orange indicator bulb (D).
! two electronic units (ballast) incorporated into the headlights (E) (one per headlight).
18855
18854
HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80
80-13
Headlights with xenon bulbs
! a rear height sensor (F) located under the left hand side of the vehicle. It records the height of the body and sends it to the sensor/computer.
! a front sensor/computer (G) which records the height of the front axle. The computer adjusts the headlights in line with variations in ride height due to acceleration, braking and variations in load.
NOTE: the vehicle speed information is used to alter the beam height at high speed.
! two specific adjustment actuators (H) mounted on the back of each lens unit.
18853
18852
18849
HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80
80-14
Headlights with xenon bulbs
LAYOUT DIAGRAM
1. actuator2. headlight3. electronic unit (ballast)4. front sensor / computer5. rear sensorA: + lightingB: + after ignition feedC: diagnostic connectionD: vehicle speed informationE: earth
19046
HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80
80-15
Headlights with xenon bulbs
REAR HEIGHT SENSOR
REMOVAL
Remove the rear left hand wheel.
Unclip:! the end of the linkage, ! the nut (1) from the support.
Disconnect the connector and remove the sensor with its support.
Disconnect the sensor from its support using the bolts (2).
REFITTING
IMPORTANT: after the sensor has been refitted, the system must be initialised and the headlights adjusted (refer to the Initialisation section).
Connection
18853
18824
Track Description
123456
EarthNot usedNot usedNot usedSupplySensor signal
HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80
80-16
Headlights with xenon bulbs
FRONT SENSOR/COMPUTER
REMOVAL
Remove the front left hand wheel.
Unclip the ball joint (A) connected to the lower wishbone and slacken the mounting bolt (B).
Disconnect the connector and remove the sensor.
REFITTING
IMPORTANT: after the front sensor/computer has been refitted, the system must be initialised and the headlights adjusted (refer to the Initialisation section).
Connection
IMPORTANT: after the front sensor/computer has been replaced, the vehicle type must be configured using the diagnostic tool and the system must be initialised.
18852
18823
Track Description
12345678
EarthSupplyRear sensor signalVehicle speed signalDiagnostic connectionLighting signalActuator controlRear sensor supply
HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80
80-17
Headlights with xenon bulbs
HEADLIGHTS
The method for removing/refitting headlights with xenon bulbs is the same as the method for all other types of headlights.
WARNING: Xenon bulbs operate at a voltage of 20 000 volts when switching on, then 85 volts A.C. when operating.
It is therefore essential to disconnect the lens unit and wait for the computer (ballast) to cool down before removal.
It is forbidden to light the bulb if it is not in the lens unit (dangerous to the eyes).
Connection
NOTE: track numbers are read from right to left on all headlights.
18849
Track Description
12345
EarthMain beamNot usedDipped beamSide lights
HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80
80-18
Headlights with xenon bulbs
ACTUATORS
REMOVAL
Remove the trim and move the power assisted steering fluid reservoir (if necessary).
Disconnect the actuator connector.
Tighten the adjusting screw (A) (six turns maximum).
Turn the actuator through an eighth of a turn towards the outside then release it from the lens unit.
Disconnect the ball joint from the parabola, tilting the actuator slightly.
NOTE: the headlight does not have to be removed to remove the actuator.
REFITTING
When fitting a new part, tighten the actuator adjusting screw by six turns.
To assist removal of the actuator, remove the sealed cover and hold the headlight reflector.
Slacken the adjusting screw (six turns).
IMPORTANT: after the actuators have been removed, the system must be initialised and the headlights adjusted (refer to the "initialisation section).
Connection
NOTE: the actuators of headlights with xenon bulbs are specific.
NOTE: if the dipped beam headlights are lit when the ignition is switched on, the actuators are set to their lowest position and then return to an intermediate position.
18849
18849
Track Description
123
EarthActuator controlSupply
HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80
80-19
Headlights with xenon bulbs
XENON BULB
REMOVAL
WARNING: Xenon bulbs operate at a voltage of 20 000 volts when switched on, then 85 volts A.C. when operating.
It is therefore essential to disconnect the lens unit and wait for the computer (ballast) to cool down before removal.
It is forbidden to light the bulb if it is not in the lens unit (dangerous to the eyes).
Disconnect the bulb connector by turning it through a quarter of a turn in an anti-clockwise direction.
Remove the bulb by unclipping the retaining clips.
WARNING: the bulb should not be subject to any impacts as the external conductor (1) is very fragile and must not be damaged.
REFITTING
Hold the bulb by the base (do not touch the bulb with your fingers, if you do, you must clean it with alcohol and a soft lint-free cloth).
Position the bulb. The lug (2) must be opposite the groove in the headlight.
Position the bulb connector by turning it through a quarter of a turn.
NOTE: the headlight does not have to be removed to remove the bulb.
IMPORTANT: after a xenon bulb is replaced, the system must be initialised and the headlights adjusted (refer to the Initialisation section).
The method for replacing the main beam bulbs and dipped beam bulbs is the same as for normal headlights.
18850
18850
HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with xenon bulbs 80
80-20
Headlights with xenon bulbs
ELECTRONIC UNIT (BALLAST)
WARNING: Xenon bulbs operate at a voltage of 20 000 volts when switching on, then 85 volts A.C. when operating.
It is therefore essential to disconnect the lens unit and wait for the computer (ballast) to cool down before removal.
It is forbidden to light the bulb if it is not in the lens unit (dangerous to the eyes).
REMOVAL
Remove the relevant headlight,
Place the headlight on a clean cloth so as not to scratch it.
Disconnect the bulb connector by turning it through a quarter of a turn in an anti-clockwise direction.
Remove the star head screws (A).
Disconnect the supply from the electronic unit (B).
REFITTING
The seal must be replaced every time the electronic unit is removed.
Use the correct tightening torque for the electronic unit (torque of 1.3 Nm).
Route the high voltage wiring correctly.
IMPORTANT: after an electronic unit (ballast) has been removed, the system must be initialised and the headlights adjusted (refer to the Initialisation section).
18854
18851
HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with Xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with Xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with Xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with Xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with Xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with Xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with Xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with Xenon bulbs 80HEADLIGHTSHeadlights with Xenon bulbs 80
80-21
Headlights with Xenon bulbs
INITIALISATION OF THE SYSTEM AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE HEADLIGHTS
This procedure should be performed after working on the headlights, on a sensor or on any part of the suspension.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
IMPORTANT: do not apply the handbrake.
Ensure that the vehicle is unladen, with a full tank of fuel and do not get into the vehicle during the operation.
Check the tyre pressures and open the bonnet.
Connect the diagnostic tools and check that there are no faults.
Switch on the ignition and the dipped beam headlights and select and validate the computer.
Run the: AC 010: Computer calibration command.
NOTE:
It is possible to check that the system has been initialised:– The value on the front sensor read by parameter
PR017: front height should be the same as the initial front height value (PR004),
– The value on the rear sensor read by parameter PR018: rear height should be the same as the initial rear height value (PR005).
Without switching off the ignition and using a headlight setting tool, adjust the height using screw (D) and the direction using screw (E).
IMPORTANT: the level of the vehicle must not change between initialisation and adjustment of the headlights. These two operations must be performed together.
IMPORTANT: it is not possible to initialise the system:– if the vehicle speed is not present or is non zero, – if the position of a sensor is outside the tolerances,– if the computer has not been correctly configured.
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRear light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRear light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRear light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRear light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRear light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRear light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRear light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRear light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRear light 81SALOON
181REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRear light
On the saloon, the rear lens units are split into two parts, one on the wing and the other on the tailgate.
REMOVAL OF THE WING LIGHTS
Remove the rear mounting (A).Release the unit and disconnect the connector.
To access the bulbs, unclip the bulb holder by pressing on the tab (B).
CONNECTION
Rear left hand wing lights connector
Rear right hand wing lights connector
REMOVAL OF THE TAILGATE LIGHTS
Remove the rear mounting (D).Release the unit and disconnect the connector.
To access the bulbs, unclip the bulb holder by pressing on the tab (E).
NOTE: on some versions, the mounting (D) is replaced by a nut and bolt.
CONNECTION
Rear left hand tailgate lights connector
Rear right hand tailgate lights connector
18317
TRACK Description
12345
IndicatorEarthNot usedSide lightBrake lights
TRACK Description
12345
Side lightBrake lightsNot usedEarthIndicator
18318
TRACK Description
12345
EarthFog lightReversing lightSide lightNot used
TRACK Description
12345
Not usedSide lightReversing lightFog lightEarth
81-1
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRear light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRear light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRear light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRear light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRear light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRear light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRear light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRear light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRear light 81
81-2
ESTATE181REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Rear light
REMOVAL OF THE WING LIGHT
The bumper does not have to be removed to remove the rear lights.
REFITTING
Fit the light.
Tighten the wing mounting (A), followed by the mountings on the tailgate side (B).
CONNECTION
Rear right hand lights connector
Rear left hand lights connector
18825
TRACK Description
123456
IndicatorFog lightSide lightBrake lightEarthReversing light
TRACK Description
123456
Reversing lightEarthSide lightBrake lightFog lightIndicator
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSBrake light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSBrake light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSBrake light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSBrake light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSBrake light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSBrake light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSBrake light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSBrake light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSBrake light 81Brake light
REMOVAL OF THE THIRD BRAKE LIGHT
The tailgate trim does not have to be removed to remove the third brake light (refer to the Bodywork section).
NOTE: saloon vehicles are fitted with a brake light containing a bulb. Estate vehicles are fitted with a brake light containing diodes.
18319
81-3
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSInterior lighting 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSInterior lighting 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSInterior lighting 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSInterior lighting 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSInterior lighting 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSInterior lighting 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSInterior lighting 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSInterior lighting 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSInterior lighting 81
81-4
Interior lighting
SPECIAL NOTES
Depending on version, vehicles can have:! independent door sill lights (which light up when the
relevant door is opened).! timed courtesy lights (front and rear).! under-dashboard lights and lights under the front
seats linked to the courtesy lights.! lights in the luggage compartment.! vanity lights on each sun visor.
TIMER OPERATION
The interior lights (courtesy lights and footwell lights) are illuminated instantly by the UCH:! when a door or the tailgate is opened,! when the doors are unlocked with the remote control
(or the hands-free function),! when the Renault Card is removed from the reader.
The UCH switches the interior lights off after a delay– switch off without delay:
! when the doors are locked using the remote control (doors closed)
– switch off with delay:! after the last door is closed,! when the doors are unlocked with the remote
control,! when the ignition is switched on.
NOTE: if a door is left open for a long time without the ignition being switched on or off, the UCH switches off the interior lights after a 15 minute delay (approximately).
COURTESY LIGHTS
Depending on the position of the courtesy light and the vehicle equipment, the lighting may have:! a single central lighting switch,! a central lighting switch and a map reading light,! a central lighting switch and two map reading lights,! a central lighting switch with dimmer and two map
reading lights.
REMOVAL / REFITTING
To remove the roof courtesy light:! unclip the translucent cover,! pull on the locating tabs,! rotate to release the connector.
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSInterior lighting 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSInterior lighting 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSInterior lighting 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSInterior lighting 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSInterior lighting 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSInterior lighting 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSInterior lighting 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSInterior lighting 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSInterior lighting 81
81-5
CENTRAL COURTESY LIGHT bottom of the range version (two buttons)
CENTRAL COURTESY LIGHT top of the range version (four buttons)
REAR COURTESY LIGHT bottom of the range version (one switch)
REAR COURTESY LIGHT top of the range version (three buttons)
TRACK Description
123456
Not usedSignal from the UCH (door open)Rear courtesy light connection+ lighting (depending on version)+ permanentEarth
TRACK Description
123456
Not usedSignal from the UCH (door open)Rear courtesy light connection (rheostat) + lighting+ permanentEarth
18460
TRACK Description
123456
Not usedSignal from the UCH (door open)Front courtesy light connectionNot usedNot usedEarth
TRACK Description
123456
Not usedSignal from the UCH (door open)Front courtesy light connection (rheostat) + lighting+ permanentEarth
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSUnder-dashboard light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSUnder-dashboard light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSUnder-dashboard light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSUnder-dashboard light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSUnder-dashboard light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSUnder-dashboard light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSUnder-dashboard light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSUnder-dashboard light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSUnder-dashboard light 81Under-dashboard light
Vehicles have lights underneath the dashboard and lights under the front seats linked to the courtesy light. They are located:! under the glove compartment (passenger's side),! under the steering wheel (1),! under the front seats (2) (depending on version).
These lights are controlled by the UCH:! when the doors are unlocked with the remote control
(or the hands-free function),! when a door is opened,! when the Renault Card is removed from the reader.
18631
18832
81-6
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSLower door light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSLower door light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSLower door light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSLower door light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSLower door light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSLower door light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSLower door light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSLower door light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSLower door light 81Lower door light
The doors have independent lights controlled by the UCH when the door is opened. Only the light of the relevant door lights up.
NOTE: replacing the bulb or removing the light requires the door trim to be partially removed (refer to the bodywork section).
18597
18591
81-7
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSGlove compartment light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSGlove compartment light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSGlove compartment light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSGlove compartment light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSGlove compartment light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSGlove compartment light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSGlove compartment light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSGlove compartment light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSGlove compartment light 81Glove compartment light
REMOVAL / REFITTING
To remove the glove compartment light (1), remove the base which is held in place by a screw.Press the retaining tab on the light to release it.
18473
81-8
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSVanity light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSVanity light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSVanity light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSVanity light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSVanity light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSVanity light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSVanity light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSVanity light 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSVanity light 81Vanity light
Depending on the version, the vanity mirrors may be fitted with a light incorporated into the headlining.
The switch is located on the mirror cover (1) on the sun visor (2). The current is transmitted to the light (3) by the central mounting (4) of the sun visors.
NOTE: operation of the switch can be checked through the mounting connection:! mirror cover closed (switch open) = light out = infinite
resistance,! mirror cover open (switch closed) = light on = zero
resistance.
81-9
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81
81-10
Relay/fuse box
DESCRIPTION
The relay/fuse box is clipped onto the UCH on the driver's side of the dashboard.
Depending on vehicle equipment, two models of relay/fuse box can be fitted:! a bottom of the range version! a top of the range version
NOTES: only the top of the range relay/fuse box is available from the spare parts department. This can be fitted instead and in place of the bottom of the range version.
Fuses and shunts fitted in the relay/fuse box, depending on vehicle equipment. They must be positioned in the same place in a new box.
18545
18321
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81
81-11
REMOVAL
NOTE: locking the air bag computer deactivates the firing lines and unlocks the electric steering column lock.
NOTES:! It is essential to read the configurations using the
diagnostic tool when replacing the UCH.! the relay/fuse box is clipped onto the UCH. One has
to be removed to remove the other.
Disconnect the battery.
Remove:! the side of the dashboard on the driver's side,! the cover under the dashboard,! the UCH mounting screw (1),! the accessories/voice synthesiser speaker cover (2).
Cut the plastic harness retaining clip (3).
Disconnect the connectors from the UCH and the relay/fuse box.
Remove the UCH and relay/fuse box assembly.
Separate the UCH and the relay/fuse box by pressing on the tabs (4).
REFITTING
Connect the connectors correctly and refit a large clip (3) to keep the harness in place.
18545
18321
18322
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81
81-12
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81
81-13
Fuse symbols
Allocation of fuses (depending on equipment level)
N° Symbol Rating Description
F1 20A Headlight main beam
F2 10A UCH supply - Relay / Fuse Box supply - Transponder - Map reading light - Engine start button
F3 10A Voice synthesiser - Xenon headlights beam correction - Instrument panels - De-icing nozzles
F4 20A Reversing lights - Heating and air conditioning - Parking assistance - Alarm + after ignition feed information - Lighting controlled by electric locks - Rain sensor - Heated windscreen
F5 15A Timed interior lighting
F6 20A Stop lights - Wiper stalk - Diagnostic socket - Tyre pressure monitoring display - Child proof locks indicator light - Rear electric door locks indicator light - Electric window switch lighting
F7 15A Left-hand dipped headlight
F8 7.5 A Right-hand side light
F9 15A Hazard warning lights and indicators
F10 10A Communication system - Radio
F11 30A Voice synthesiser - Instrument panel - Front fog lights - Electric tailgate lock
F12 5A Air bags and pretensioners
F13 5A ABS - Electronic brakeforce distribution computer
F14 15A Horn
F15 30A Driver's electric window
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81
81-14
Consumer cut-off fuse
This fuse is located under the ashtray, in the central console.
N° Symbol Rating Description
F16 30A Passenger's electric window
F17 10A Rear fog light
F18 10A De-icing rear-view mirrors
F19 15A Right-hand dipped headlight
F20 7.5 A Left-hand side lights - Dimmer controlled and glove compartment lighting - Number plate lighting
F21 30A Rear screen and windscreen wipers
F22 30A Central door locking
F23 15A Console accessories socket - Radiotelephone
F24 15A Cigarette lighter - Boot rear accessories socket
F25 10A Steering lock - Heated rear screen - Front seats - Rear electric window deactivation
N° Rating Description
F50 20A Consumer cut-off fuse:
Diagnostic socket
Radio
Air conditioning computer
Seat position memory computer
Radio display/clock/external temperature control panel
Navigation assistance computer
Tyre pressure computer
Central Communication Unit
Alarm connection
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81
81-15
Allocation (depending on equipment level)
U1 (24 track connector) U2 (24 track connector)
Track Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Central door locking output
Central door locking output
Front left-hand side light shunt input
Spare
Front right-hand side light shunt input
Number plate lighting shunt input
Right-hand side light fuse fault input
Left-hand side light fuse fault input
Spare
Dipped beam headlight input
Rear right-hand side light shunt input
Spare
Spare
Electronic relay and fuse box supply input
Spare
Stop lights fault input
Rear left-hand side light shunt input
Spare
Left-hand brake light shunt input
Central door locking input
Right-hand brake light shunt input
Stop switch input
Central door locking output
Central door locking output
Track Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Rear screen wiper relay output
Relayed + after ignition feed input (electronic key)
Relayed idle + after ignition feed input (electronic key)
Relayed + after ignition feed output (electronic key)
Central door locking supply input
Spare
Spare
Central door locking relay output - opening
Relay plate 2 output
Central door locking relay output - closing
Relay plate 1 output
Indicators input
Indicators input
Spare
Left-hand indicator control output
Indicator diagnostic input
Right-hand indicator control output
Windscreen wipers slow and fast speed relay output
Indicators supply input
Windscreen wipers on/off relay output
Starting inhibition relay output
Side lights input
Timed supply relay output
UCH supply input
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81
81-16
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81
81-17
Allocation (depending on equipment level)
CGB1 (15 track connector) BLACK CGB2 (15 track connector) GREY
WHITE
Track Description
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Not used
+ front fog lights
+ front fog lights relay
Not used
Not used
Passenger compartment protected + battery feed 1 (caravan connection)
BLACK
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
central door locking protected + battery feed
ABS/ESP protected + after ignition feed
Air bag protected + after ignition feed
Not used
Protected + accessories feed
Not used
Protected + accessories feed
Protected + accessories feed
Protected + accessories feed
WHITE
Track Description
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Protected + battery feed (air conditioning)
Protected + battery feed (air conditioning)
Protected + accessories feed
Central door locking closing + control
Central door locking opening + control
Earth
BLACK
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
Earth
Rear door exterior interior unlocking control
Driver's rear exterior locking control
Rear interior locking control
Rear interior locking control
Driver's rear exterior unlocking and front interior unlocking control
Driver's rear exterior unlocking and front interior unlocking control
Not used
Boot lighting timer + control
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81
81-18
Allocation (depending on equipment level)
CGB3 (15 track connector) BROWN CGB4 (15 track connector) GREEN
WHITE
Track Description
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
+ dipped beam
Not used
Main beam headlight + control
Not used
Horn fuse + control
Rear fog light fuse + control
BLACK
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
+ right-hand dipped headlight
+ left-hand dipped headlight
Rear-view mirror de-icing fuse protected + control
Rear fog light protected + control
Not used
Passenger's/driver's electric window battery protected + accessories feed
Interior lighting - control
Electric window protected + battery feed
Horn + control
WHITE
Track Description
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Main beam headlight fuse + control
Rear function locking relay coil control
Rear electric window battery or after ignition feed
Rear electric window relay control
Not used
Heated rear screen + control
BLACK
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
Signal reception unit fuse protected + battery feed
Not used
Accessories fuse protected after ignition feed
Rear screen wiper + control
Not used
Courtesy light timer + control
Rear right-hand side light + control
Front right-hand side light + control
Heated rear screen relay - control
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81
81-19
CGB5 (12 track connector) BLUE CGB6 (18 track connector) CRYSTAL
WHITE
Track Description
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Protected + battery feed by passenger compartment 3
Not used
+ after ignition feed
Central door locking protected + battery feed
Not used
Protected + battery feed by passenger compartment 2
BLACK
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
Earth
+ main beam
+ starting
Side lights relay control
Not used
Dipped beam relay control
WHITE
Track Description
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
Not used
Heated rear screen control fuse protected + after ignition feed
Heated rear screen control fuse protected + after ignition feed
Not used
Not used
Not used
Flasher unit timed + control
Left-hand indicator control
Right-hand indicator control
BLACK
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
Timer windscreen wiper slow speed + control
Timer windscreen wiper high speed + control
Stop lights fuse protected + after ignition feed
Number plate lighting + control
Rear left-hand side light + control
Rear right-hand side light + control
Stop lights control
Right-hand stop light + control
Left-hand stop light + control
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81
81-20
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81
81-21
Allocation (depending on equipment level)
Track Description
REL 2
REL 7
REL 9
REL 10
REL 11
REL 12
REL 13
REL 17
REL 18
REL 19
REL 21
REL 22
REL 23
SH 1
SH 2
SH 3
SH 4
Heated rear screen relay
Front fog lights relay
Windscreen wiper relay
Windscreen wiper relay
Reversing lights / rear wiper relay
Door lock relay
Door lock relay
Rear screen wiper relay
Timed interior lighting relay
Relay plate relay
Starting inhibition relay
+ after ignition feed / electric central unit relay
Rear electric window/after-sales fitted radio, accessories relay
Rear electric window shunt
Front electric window shunt
Daytime running lights shunt
Daytime running lights shunt
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81
81-22
This fuse box is located on the relay/fuse box.
Allocation of fuses and relays (depending on equipment level)
N° Rating Description
F26
F27
F28
F29
F30
F31
R17
30A
30A
30A
30A
5A
-
Caravan socket fuse
Sunroof fuse
Rear left-hand electric window fuse
Rear right-hand electric window fuse
Steering wheel angle sensor fuse
Not used
Electric window relay
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81
81-23
The Option relay/fuse box is located on the passenger's side in the front of the glove compartment.
Allocation of fuses and relays (depending on equipment level)
18546
N° Rating Description
F32F33F34F35F36F37R3R4R5R6
--
20 A15 A20 A20 A
Not usedNot usedDriver's and passenger's heated seats fuse Driver's electric seat supply fuse Driver's electric seat fuse Passenger's electric seat fuse Seat supply relay Side light relay for daytime running lights Dipped relay for daytime running lightsHeadlight washer pump relayStop lights cut-off relay
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81
81-24
Relay and fuse box (engine side)
Allocation of fuses (depending on equipment level)
N° Rating Description
F1F2F3F4F5F6F7F8F9
F10F11F12F13F14F15F16F17F18F19F20F21F22F23
7.5 A-
30 A5 A-15 A
30 A10 A
--
20 A30 A30 A70 A70 A70 A60 A40 A40 A70 A70 A60 A60 A80 A
-
Automatic transmission fuse Not usedInjection relay fuseAutomatic transmission fuse Additional heating fuse Diesel heater relayInjection computer fuse - Diesel solenoid valve - Diesel heaterNot usedNot usedFan assembly low speed fuse ABS/ESP computer fuse Horn fuse Diesel pre-heater fuse Thermoplungers fuse 2Thermoplungers fuse 1Fan assembly low and high speed fuse with air conditioningHeadlight washer fuse De-icing relayABS/ESP computer fusePassenger compartment fuse N° 1Passenger compartment fusePassenger compartment fuse N° 3Supply fuse Passenger compartment consumer cut-off fuse N° 2Windscreen de-icing fuseNot used
REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81REAR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSRelay/fuse box 81
81-25
Relay and fuse box (engine side)
Allocation of relays (depending on equipment level)
K4M-F4P-F5R-F9Q engines
L7X Engine
N° Description
R1R2R3R4R5R6R7R8R9
R10R11
Additional heating relay 1Fan assembly low speed relayNot usedNot usedAdditional heating relay 3Fuel pump relay Diesel heater relay Injection locking relayFan assembly low speed relay with air conditioningFan assembly relay with air conditioningAdditional heating relay 2
N° Description
R1R2R3R4R5R6R7R8R9
R10R11
Not usedFan assembly relay with air conditioningNot usedNot usedNot usedInjection relayFan assembly relay with air conditioningInjection locking relayFan assembly relay with air conditioningFan assembly relay with air conditioning
ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82
82-1
182ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card
SPECIAL NOTES
! The security code no longer exists but has been replaced by a repair code allocated to the vehicle for life during manufacture.– No numbers are written on the RENAULT Cards.– The vehicle does not have a label containing the
code upon delivery.
When repairing this system, this repair code number can be requested from the local assistance network (refer to Technical Note 3315E).
When requesting the code number, it is now essential to provide the vehicle's VIN as well as its fabrication number. This allows the operator to identify the vehicle in order to provide the correct code.
! Replacement RENAULT Cards are supplied non-coded and without an emergency metal key. The rechargeable battery for the hands-free function is charged.
! This system can have up to four Renault Cards. The remote control function, the battery and the rechargeable battery (on the hands-free version) have no effect on the engine immobiliser.
! This system can, depending on version, be combined with one RENAULT Card with the hands-free function.The car cannot have more than one RENAULT Card with the hands-free function.
! In the event of a card being stolen or lost or upon the customer's request, one or more RENAULT Cards can be unallocated from a vehicle. These can be reallocated to the same vehicle if necessary.
! WARNING: with this system, it is not possible to replace more than one (UCH and RENAULT Cards or UCH and injection computer) at the same time. These parts are sold non-coded.
It is effectively not possible to code these components when replacing them, if none of them has the vehicle's original code in its memory (see allocation table).
! There is no way of erasing the code programmed into the system components. The programmed code cannot be erased.
ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82
82-2
GENERAL
It consists of an engine immobiliser system controlled by a RENAULT Card with random rolling code recognition system.
A coded chip (operating without a battery) independent to the remote control function is incorporated into each of the vehicle's RENAULT Cards.
The engine immobiliser is active a few seconds after the RENAULT Card is removed from the card reader. Its status is shown by the flashing red light on the instrument panel and by the locking of the electric steering column lock.
During manufacture, a twelve character hexadecimal code is allocated to the vehicle to make the engine immobiliser operational.
This repair code is required in after-sales in order to:! add RENAULT Cards,! replace one or more RENAULT Cards,! unallocate one or more RENAULT Cards (e.g. if lost
or stolen),! replace a UCH.
NOTE: To obtain the repair code, it is essential to know the vehicle identification number. There are several ways depending on country (refer to Technical Note 3315E):! Minitel,! voice server,! Techline.
ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82
82-3
SYSTEM PRESENTATION
AB C DEFGHI
RENAULT CardRENAULT Card reader containing the engine immobiliser receiverUCH and relay fuse boxEngine immobiliser indicator light (instrument panel)Injection computer (petrol or diesel)Electric steering column lockDiagnostic socketEngine start/stop button Clutch pedal and gearbox neutral position sensors
Multiplex connectionWire connection
123
+ accessories position (accessories feed)+ after ignition feed positionStarter motor supply
ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82
82-4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
With this system, the engine immobiliser is activated several seconds after the ignition is switched off (shown by the engine immobiliser light flashing and the locking of the electric steering column lock).
The system comprises:
! two specific RENAULT Cards (A) fitted with a coded chip used for controlling the engine immobiliser,– only one of the RENAULT Cards can have the
hands-free function,– Two further cards can be added (maximum of
four),
! an engine immobiliser receiver located in the card reader (B), fitted with electronics for transmitting the code of the RENAULT Cards to the UCH (C).
NOTE: The RENAULT Card reader is not coded.
! a UCH (C) located under the dashboard on the driver's side.
For the engine immobiliser function, the UCH:– decodes the signal of the RENAULT Card from the
card reader,– controls the engine immobiliser by sending a code
to the electric steering lock,– communicates with the injection computer,– operates the engine immobiliser indicator light and
the card reader light, – communicates with the diagnostic tool.
NOTE: Refer to section 87 for the other functions controlled by the UCH.
! an engine immobiliser warning light (D) located on the instrument panel used to signal:– activation of the engine immobiliser,– non-recognition of the RENAULT Card,– a system fault,– a problem on the injection computer or the electric
steering lock.
! a coded injection computer (E),
! a diagnostic socket (G) used for fault finding operations and configuring the system,
! a coded electric steering column lock (F).
! clutch pedal and gearbox position sensors (I) and a stop/start button (H) to supply the starter.
ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82
82-5
OPERATION
When the engine immobiliser is operational, the engine immobiliser indicator light flashes (slowly: once a second). The electric steering column lock is locked.
! Once the RENAULT Card is inserted into the reader, the code of the RENAULT Card is sent to the UCH.
! If the code is recognised by the UCH, this sends a coded signal to the electric steering column lock via the multiplex network.
! If the coded signal received by the electric lock is identical to the one it has in its memory, the lock releases the steering column and sends a confirmation message to the UCH.
! When the UCH receives this message, it applies the + after ignition feed and switches off the engine immobiliser indicator light.
! When the ignition is on, the UCH and the injection computer send coded signals to each other via the multiplex network.
! If the signals issued by the UCH and the injection computer match, the UCH authorises the engine to start and the injection is unlocked.
SPECIAL CASES
! If the injection computer or the electric steering column lock do not have a stored reference code: the code which is sent is entered into the memory.
! If the codes in the UCH and the RENAULT Card do not coincide, the system will remained locked. The engine immobiliser indicator light flashes (quickly). The vehicle is not authorised to start and the electric steering column lock remains locked.
! If the indicator light is on, without the presence of + after ignition feed, there is a problem in the vehicle electric steering column lock.
! If the indicator light is on, with the presence of + after ignition feed, there is a problem in the vehicle injection.
IMPORTANT: when the vehicle battery has a low charge, the drop in voltage caused by operating the starter may set the immobiliser. If the voltage is too low, the engine cannot be started, even by pushing the vehicle.
ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82
82-6
REPLACEMENT AND CONFIGURATION OF THE UCH
New parts are not coded. Once fitted on the vehicle, they must therefore be programmed with a code to become operational.
To perform this procedure, it is essential that some parts on the vehicle are already correctly coded (with the vehicle code). Refer to the allocation table.
WARNING: If a part is programmed with a code, the part is then allocated to the vehicle and the code cannot be erased nor can the part be programmed with a second code. The programmed code cannot be erased.
ALLOCATION TABLE
AFTER SALES OPERATION
COMPONENT STATUSREPAIR CODE
NEEDEDUCHRENAULT
CardInjection
computer,Electric
steering lock
Programming of the UCH
Blank Coded Coded - YES
Allocation or de-allocation of a
RENAULT CardCoded Blank* Coded - YES
Programming of the electric steering
lockCoded Coded - Blank NO
Programming of the injection computer
Coded Coded Blank Coded NO
* The RENAULT Card allocated to a vehicle must be blank or already programmed on this vehicle.NOTE: a card may be programmed on a vehicle but not operational (not allocated).
REMINDER: only the RENAULT Cards used during the allocation process will be operational.
ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82
82-7
REPLACEMENT AND CONFIGURATION OF THE UCH
A new UCH is not coded. Once fitted on the vehicle, it must therefore be programmed with a code to become operational.
To perform this procedure, at least one of the vehicle's old RENAULT Cards and the repair code are required and the injection computer must be correctly coded (refer to the allocation table).
REMINDER: only the RENAULT Cards used during this procedure will be operational provided that:! they have already been coded on this vehicle,! they are new (not coded).
UCH PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
! Set up a dialogue with the Engine immobiliser system.
! In the Command, Specific command menu, select and confirm SC027: program UCH line.
! The tool displays Please enter the after-sales code.Without the RENAULT Card in the reader, enter the secret after-sales code (12 hexadecimal characters) and confirm.
! If the code format is correct, the tool displays Insert a card which has already been programmed on the vehicle, and the programming procedure will commence.
! The tool displays UCH programmed; the UCH is coded. Now enter RENAULT Card programming mode to allocate other cards (maximum of four). It may take several seconds before this message appears.
WARNING: the maximum delay between each operation is 2 minutes, otherwise the procedure is cancelled and the tool then displays the message procedure interrupted: warning - cards allocated to this vehicle are those which were allocated before the procedure was started. Cards inserted before the procedure was interrupted are no longer blank and can only be allocated to this vehicle. This message also appears if the dialogue with the UCH is lost or if the battery is disconnected.
SPECIAL CASES
If the screen displays:! remove the card from the reader, there is
already a card in the reader,! Check the after-sales code and ensure that the
card is for this vehicle: the code read is incorrect or the UCH has already been coded on another vehicle. Check the code then try to enter it again.
! Do you want to check the cards before assigning them to the vehicle?: the UCH is already coded on this vehicle, the UCH enters RENAULT Card reallocation mode.
! Card cannot be used on this vehicle the card code does not correspond to the current vehicle.
! The card presented is blank. Please insert another card which has already been programmed on the vehicle: insert a card which has already been coded.
! UCH programming failure. Repeat the whole procedure.
WARNING: when a UCH has been programmed with the RENAULT Card code, it cannot be erased or another code stored in its place.
WARNING: If a code is programmed into the UCH, this is then allocated to the vehicle and the code cannot be erased or the part programmed with a second code.
ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82
82-8
RENAULT CARD ALLOCATION PROCEDURE
NOTE: it is possible to find out whether a Renault Card is blank or not by means of the ET 115: blank card status.
IMPORTANT: if none of the RENAULT Cards is available, a reallocation procedure will have to be carried out later with all cards.
! In the Command, Specific command menu, select and confirm SC001 card programming line.
! The screen displays Do you want to check the cards before allocating them to the vehicle?
! If a check of the cards is requested, the tool displays Insert the card fully into the reader. Insert a RENAULT Card until the ignition is switched on:– If the Allocation is not possible, the screen displays
Verify the After Sales code and make sure the card belongs to the vehicle. Insert another card.
– If the card is correct, the screen displays remove the card from the reader.
! The tool displays Insert the card fully into the reader. Insert a RENAULT Card fully into the reader and confirm:– If the RENAULT Card is not accepted, the red
indicator light does not light up.– If the RENAULT Card is accepted, the red warning
light flashes quickly and the tool displays 1 card programmed then remove the card from the reader.
! The tool displays Insert the card fully into the reader. Then insert a second RENAULT Card until the ignition is switched on:NOTE: If the same RENAULT Card is inserted twice, the system ignores this and the red indicator light does not light up.
! Insert the RENAULT Card or the other Cards to be assigned to the vehicle (maximum of 4) into the Card reader. The screen displays 2, 3 or 4 cards programmed then remove the card from the reader.
WARNING: these must be the previous RENAULT Cards for the vehicle or new non-coded RENAULT Cards.NOTE: the vehicle can only have one RENAULT Card with the hands-free function. If a second RENAULT Card is allocated to the vehicle, this will work as a normal RENAULT Card.
WARNING: the maximum time between each operation is 5 minutes, otherwise the procedure will be cancelled and the tool will display the message Procedure interrupted: warning, the cards assigned to the vehicle are the ones assigned before the procedure was started. Cards inserted before the procedure was interrupted are no longer blank and can only be allocated to this vehicle. This message also appears if the dialogue with the UCH is lost or if the battery is disconnected.
! Configure the UCH in accordance with the vehicle's options and equipment (refer to section 87).
NOTE: when replacing the UCH only, no operations are required on the injection computer as it keeps the same engine immobiliser code.
ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card 82
82-9
CODING THE INJECTION COMPUTER
The injection computer is supplied non-coded. It therefore has to be programmed with the engine immobiliser code when it is installed to allow the vehicle to be started.
Simply switch on the ignition for a few seconds without starting the engine. Switch the ignition off, the immobiliser will be activated after a few seconds.
Checking
The status of the injection computer can be ascertained using the diagnostic tools.
! Using the diagnostic tool
1. 2.
Select and confirm "Passenger compartment connection unit"Select the STATUS menu and check:– if the computer is not coded, the status
ET 111 Injection blank is active,– if the computer is coded, the status ET 111
Injection blank is not confirmed.
WARNING
With this engine immobiliser, the vehicle keeps its immobiliser code for life.In addition, this system does not have a security code.
Consequently, it is forbidden to perform tests with injection computers borrowed from the stores which must be returned.
The programmed code cannot be erased.
ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card reader 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card reader 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card reader 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card reader 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card reader 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card reader 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card reader 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card reader 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERRENAULT Card reader 82
82-10
RENAULT Card reader
The RENAULT Card reader contains two switches to allow the vehicle to operate:! one switch located at mid-travel to provide the
accessories feed (+ ACCESSORIES FEED)! one switch when the card is inserted fully into the
reader (+ AFTER IGNITION FEED)
NOTE: the RENAULT Card is locked in the reader once the UCH has received the engine running signal from the injection computer. It is released when the engine is switched off.
A specific configuration means that RENAULT Cards are not locked on vehicles with automatic transmission.
The RENAULT Card reader is used:! to act as a radio frequency receiver for locking and
unlocking the doors,! as a transponder aerial for the engine immobiliser
function and recognition of the RENAULT Card.
Operation of the reader lighting! When the doors are unlocked, the reader lights up for
approximately 30 seconds.! If the reader lights up when a RENAULT Card is
inserted, this signifies that the code corresponds to the code stored in the UCH.
! If the reader flashes quickly (at the same frequency as the engine immobiliser indicator light) when a RENAULT Card is inserted, this means that the RENAULT Card code has not been recognised by the UCH.
! The reader lights up after the engine is switched off.! If the RENAULT Card is in the reader when a door is
open (engine off), the reader flashes as a reminder.
NOTE: The reader must be replaced if the reader light develops a fault.
REMINDER: the card reader is not coded.
Refer to section 84 for removal operations and reader track allocations.
18330
ENGINE IMMOBILISERElectric steering column lock 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERElectric steering column lock 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERElectric steering column lock 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERElectric steering column lock 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERElectric steering column lock 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERElectric steering column lock 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERElectric steering column lock 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERElectric steering column lock 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERElectric steering column lock 82
82-11
Electric steering column lock
The steering column lock is located at the base of the steering column. It is controlled by the UCH.This lock is coded by the UCH and cannot be erased.
OPERATION
The steering is released when the RENAULT Card is inserted fully into the reader and when the transponder is recognised by the UCH.The steering is locked when the RENAULT Card is fully removed from the reader, the engine is off and the vehicle speed is zero.
NOTE: if the UCH has received an impact signal from the air bag computer, the steering column lock remains unlocked.
NOTE: a faulty or disconnected steering column lock prevents the engine from being started.
NOTES:! If the lock does not released when the RENAULT
Card is inserted into the reader, the engine immobiliser indicator light comes on for three seconds but the + after ignition feed is not authorised.
! If the retaining lock of the device is released when the car is moving, the Stop and engine immobiliser indicator lights come on (the steering wheel does not lock).
! If an internal switch develops a fault, the service warning light comes on.
PRECAUTIONS DURING REPAIR
Proceed as follows to prevent the steering lock from being applied when the battery is disconnected:! insert the RENAULT Card fully (+ after ignition feed)
then remove to the first stop (+ accessories feed). The steering column is not locked as long as the card remains in the first position in the reader. Disconnect the battery and the steering column will remain unlocked for as long as the battery remains disconnected and the RENAULT Card inserted.
! lock the air bag computer using a diagnostic tool.
Refer to section 84 for the connector allocations.
REMOVAL
REFITTING
Tighten the bolt to a torque of 0.8 daNm.
18541S
WARNING: the steering column lock is mounted with a reverse threaded bolt (left-hand thread). Furthermore, it can only be removed if it has first been released.
18541
ENGINE IMMOBILISERElectric steering column lock 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERElectric steering column lock 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERElectric steering column lock 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERElectric steering column lock 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERElectric steering column lock 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERElectric steering column lock 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERElectric steering column lock 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERElectric steering column lock 82ENGINE IMMOBILISERElectric steering column lock 82
82-12
CODING OF THE ELECTRIC STEERING COLUMN LOCK
The electric lock is supplied non-coded. It therefore has to be programmed with the engine immobiliser code when it is fitted to allow the ignition to be switched on.
Simply insert the RENAULT Card into the reader for a few seconds. Remove the RENAULT Card and the engine immobiliser will be activated after a few seconds. The electric lock is coded and the steering column is locked.
To check the coding of the electric steering column lock:! select Passenger compartment connection unit! in the Status menu, check that the ET 089 steering
column lock blank line has not been confirmed.
IMPORTANT:
With this engine immobiliser, the vehicle keeps its immobiliser code for life.In addition, this system does not have a security code.
Consequently, it is forbidden to perform tests with an electric lock borrowed from the stores which must be returned.
The programmed code cannot be erased.
HORNHorn 82HORNHorn 82HORNHorn 82HORNHorn 82HORNHorn 82HORNHorn 82HORNHorn 82HORNHorn 82HORNHorn 82
82-13
HORNHorn
DESCRIPTION
The horn is located behind the front bumper on the left hand side.
Depending on the model, vehicles can have:! one or two simple horns,! two horns controlled via a coded line by the UCH.
These horns are operated:! when controlled by the lighting stalk,! via a coded line from the UCH when the doors are
closed by the hands-free function (depending on version).
NOTE: the tone as well as the volume of this closing signal can be modified via UCH configuration using diagnostic tools. To do this:! set up a dialogue with the UCH,! Open the command menu and select and confirm
the configuration line.
CONNECTION (simple)
CONNECTION (coded line)
Track Description
A Supply (stalk)
B Earth
TRACK Description
1 Supply
2 Earth
3 Control (stalk or UCH)
HORNAlarm 82HORNAlarm 82HORNAlarm 82HORNAlarm 82HORNAlarm 82HORNAlarm 82HORNAlarm 82HORNAlarm 82HORNAlarm 82
82-14
Alarm
DESCRIPTION
Vehicles are pre-wired to be fitted with a Renault approved alarm.
The specific connector (A) is located behind the trim, next to the rear left hand pretensioner.
OPERATION
The ACU (Alarm Control Unit) is connected to the UCH via a serial connection.
The command to deactivate the alarm is given by the UCH via a coded line when the vehicle is unlocked using the radio frequency remote control.The command to activate the alarm is given by the UCH when:– the vehicle is locked using the radio frequency
remote control.– upon automatic relocking.
The UCH informs the alarm control unit of the status of the doors after being locked with the radio frequency remote control.
CONNECTION
18547-1
TRACK Description
1 +after ignition feed
2 Battery +
3 Locking indicator light control (not used)
4 Bonnet closed information
5 Spatial detection
6 Spatial detection
7 UCH coded connection
8 Indicator operation
INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83183INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard
NOTE: locking the air bag computer also unlocks the electric steering column lock.
REMOVAL
Move the front seats forward into order to remove the central console mounting bolts,
Move the seats back as far as possible and remove:– the RENAULT Card reader (1),
– the console bolts on the dashboard (2),
– the central console,– the radio (depending on version),– the Central Communication Unit (depending on
version),– the heating and air conditioning control unit (refer to
section 62).
IMPORTANT: all work on the air bag and pretensioner systems must be carried out by qualified personnel who have received the proper training.
WARNING: Handling the pyrotechnic systems (pretensioners or air bags) near a source of heat or a flame is forbidden; there is a risk of triggering.
18632
18830
18549
83-1
INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83
83-2
Features of the cable control, remove:– the trim from the control panel,– the mounting screws,– the control panel;
Remove:– the dashboard mounting bolt (1),
– the split radio display or the Carminat screen (depending on version) then release the harness.
– the insolation sensor (2),– the interior cover of the glove compartment secured
by a screw,– the glove compartment light, taking care not to
damage the contact finger (3),– the light under the dashboard.
Use a 13 mm spanner to lock the air bag mounting clip on the beam or remove the mounting bolt (depending on version).
NOTE: this clip must be replaced whenever it is removed.
18543
18542
18473
18544
INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83
83-3
Disconnect:– the passenger's air bag connector located near to the
options relay/fuse box,
– the steering wheel air bag cushion. To do this, insert a screwdriver into the hole (1) then move it upwards (2).
– the connectors of the steering wheel air bag (3) and the connectors of the cruise control buttons (depending on version).
Remove:– the steering wheel bolt,
– the steering wheel after setting the wheels straight,– the dial surround (4),– the steering wheel half cowlings,
– the switches.
Disconnect the stalks (wipers, radio and lighting controls), the rotary switch connectors (air bag and cruise control) and the steering wheel angle sensor.
Before removing the rotary switch assembly, mark its position:– ensuring that the wheels are straight at the time of
removal,– checking that the "0" mark of the rotary switch is
correctly positioned opposite the index.
18539
18455
18797
INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83
83-4
Slacken the screw then release the steering column assembly.
Remove:– the dial unit,
– the dashboard mounting bolt (1),
– the sides of the dashboard,– the side mounting bolts (A) of the dashboard,
– the tweeters,– the sun visors,
18558
18557
18991
INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83
83-5
– the trim from the windscreen pillars; to do this, simply release the trim sufficiently to be able to press the upper clip, then release it from the pillar and lift it upwards.
Remove the dashboard by releasing the clips.
NOTE: the automatic gear lever can be moved by pressing button (C) located in front of it.
19062
18538
18549
INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83
83-6
REFITTING
Before replacing the dashboard, position the harnesses for the tweeters, the display and the sunshine sensor.
Connect the passenger's air bag harness.
Features of the rotary switch
Ensure that the wheels are still straight.
Check that the rotary switch is correctly positioned by checking that the 0 mark of the rotary switch is opposite the index.
18542
18539
18313
INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83
83-7
Features of the instrument panel trim
Fit the instrument panel and the steering wheel lower half cowling,
Position the upper half cowling by placing the leather part as shown below.
Fit the instrument panel trim,
Position the adhesive strip of the steering wheel upper half cowling on the trim,
clip the trim onto the dashboard.
Features of the steering wheel
IMPORTANT: the splines on the steering wheel are designed to ensure that it is correctly fitted. The steering wheel should be inserted freely into the splines. Be careful not to damage them.
The steering wheel bolts must be replaced every time the steering wheel is removed and then tightened to a torque of 4.4 daNm.
18556
18555
18835
INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83INSTRUMENT PANELDashboard 83
83-8
Features of the air bag
Unlock the air bag computer.
IMPORTANT: Before reconnecting the driver's air bag, the procedure for checking the correct operation of the system must be carried out:– check that the air bag warning light on the
instrument panel lights up when the ignition is switched on (computer unlocked),
– Connect a dummy ignition module to the connector of each air bag and check that the indicator light switches off,
– switch off the ignition, connect the air bag in place of the dummy ignition modules and position it on the steering wheel,
– switch on the ignition and check that the warning light comes on for 3 seconds when the ignition is switched on and then goes out.
If the warning light does not go out, refer to the Fault finding section.
WARNING: If these instructions are not followed the system may not operate normally and could even cause erratic triggering.
18554
INSTRUMENT PANELInstrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELInstrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELInstrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELInstrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELInstrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELInstrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELInstrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELInstrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELInstrument panel 83
83-9
Instrument panel
REPLACEMENT
The service interval can be altered in the injection computer by the diagnostic tools.
REMOVAL
Set up a dialogue using the diagnostic tool in order to lock the air bag computer.
NOTE: locking the air bag computer also unlocks the electric steering column lock.
Disconnect the battery.
Remove:– the instrument panel trim clipped onto the
dashboard,– the steering wheel upper cowling,– the instrument panel mounting bolt (1).
Disconnect the two connectors.
REFITTING
Reconnect and reposition the instrument panel.
Fit the upper half cowling, then position the leather cover (2) (see illustration).
Refit the instrument panel trim on the dashboard.
IMPORTANT: ensure that the system is correctly configured for an instrument panel with a large display.
18558
18556
18555
INSTRUMENT PANELInstrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELInstrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELInstrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELInstrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELInstrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELInstrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELInstrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELInstrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELInstrument panel 83
83-10
CONNECTION (fullest version)
Red connector
1 Not used2 Discrete key (*)3 Not used4 Not used5 Lighting dimmer6 ADAC scroll button7 Not used8 Voice synthesiser multiplexing (*)9 Not used10 Multiplexing11 Multiplexing12 Fault finding line (*)13 Voice synthesiser multiplexing (*)14 Not used15 Not used
Grey connector
1 Door open switch indicator (*)2 Turning right signal indicator light3 Turning left signal indicator light4 + before ignition feed5 Engine immobiliser indicator light6 Seat belt indicator (*)7 Not used8 Dipped beam headlights indicator light9 Main beam headlights indicator light10 Not used11 Rear fog light indicator light12 Front fog lights indicator light13 Low screen wash warning light14 Battery charge warning light15 Heated seat indicator light16 + after ignition feed17 Not used18 Oil pressure warning light19 Bonnet information (*)20 Not used21 Oil level sensor22 Fuel sender signal23 Not used24 Earth25 Fuel sender earth26 Oil level sensor earth27 Side light indicator light28 Repeat key (*)29 Hand brake indicator light30 Brake fault warning light
(*): Top of the Range
18472
INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83
83-11
Bottom of the range instrument panel
GENERAL
The bottom of the range instrument panel contains the following functions:
– needle gauge functions! vehicle speed! rev counter! coolant temperature! fuel level
– audible function (ignition on)! indicators! headlights on reminder when a door is opened! Renault Card in reader reminder! automatic locking when driving confirmation! child safety fault warning! limit speed exceeded (Arabia) (depending on
version)! automatic headlight switch-on warning (depending
on version)! cruise control / speed limit warning (depending on
version)
– warning and indicator light function
– display function! oil level reading! odometer
– total mileage– trip mileage
! ADAC– fuel consumed– average consumption– current consumption– fuel range– distance covered– average speed– mileage before oil change– cruise control or speed limiter set speed
(depending on version)
– display of the automatic transmission ratio engaged (depending on version)
– limit speed exceeded alarm (Arabia) (depending on version).
NOTE: fault finding operations cannot be performed on the bottom of the range instrument panel using diagnostic tools. It does however have a self-diagnostic mode.
NOTE: the oil service interval can be altered using the diagnostic tools by setting up communications with the injection computer.
INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83
83-12
OPERATION OF THE DISPLAY
❶ oil level reading
This function is displayed for approximately 30 seconds when the ignition is switched on or after the engine is started.
If the level is between the maximum and authorised minimum, the display shows oil ok
13141a
If, during this time the ADAC or Reset buttons are pressed, the display shows oil ok and then the oil level is shown by squares. These disappear as the oil level drops and are replaced by dashes.
13141b
If the oil level is at a minimum when the ignition is switched on, the dashes and the word oil flash for 30 seconds. The service warning light goes on and remains lit after the engine is started.
13141c
NOTE:! Under normal operating conditions, the oil level is
only measured if the ignition has been switched off for more than one minute; otherwise the old oil level value is re-displayed.
! However, when a fault is detected on the dipstick, the display switches directly to the mileometer function when the ignition is switched on.
! It is normal to find that the oil level is not always the same: Various parameters are involved:– parking on a slope,– too short a wait after running the engine for a short
moment (especially when the oil is cold), etc.
# odometer
Total mileage
The mileometer will be displayed for approximately 30 seconds when the ignition is switched on (after the oil level information). Pressing the ADAC or Reset button reduces this display time.
Trip mileage
The trip meter is displayed instead in the place of the total mileage if the ADAC button is pressed briefly.
It is reset by pressing the Reset button. Resetting the trip mileage is not the same as resetting the ADAC.
NOTE: it is not possible to select display in kilometres or miles. The instrument panel must be replaced.
INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83
83-13
$ on-board computer (ADAC)
The various sequences of the on-board computer may be displayed instead of the mileage recorders by successively pressing the button on the end of the wiper stalk (ADAC button).It is reset by pressing the Reset button.
The information from the on-board computer is displayed after the trip meter as follows:
– Fuel consumed (in l/100km or mpg *) since the last reset.
13141d
– Average consumption (in l/100 km or mpg *) since the last reset.
13141e
This is only displayed after the car has travelled approximately 400 metres. Below this, fixed dashes appear on the display.
This takes into consideration the distance covered and the fuel consumption since the last time the reset button was pressed.
* UK version.
– Current consumption (in l/100 km or mpg)
13141f
This is only displayed when the vehicle speed is above approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Below this, fixed dashes appear on the display.
In the accelerator pedal no load position, if the speed is greater than 20 mph (30 km/h), the current consumption is equal to 0.
NOTE: this function is not available on the UK version.
– Estimated range with remaining fuel (in km or miles*).
13141g
This is only displayed after the car has travelled approximately 400 metres. Below this, fixed dashes appear on the display.
This is the potential distance remaining calculated by taking into account the distance travelled, the amount of fuel remaining in the tank and the fuel consumed.
NOTE: the range remaining is not displayed when the low fuel warning light is lit.
INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83
83-14
– Distance travelled since the last reset (reset of the ADAC).
13141 h
– Average speed since the last reset.
13141j
This is only displayed after the car has travelled approximately 400 metres. Below this, fixed dashes appear on the display.
This is obtained by dividing the distance travelled by the time elapsed since the last time the reset button was pressed.
The time base is inside the on-board computer.
– Mileage to next oil change informs the driver of the distance (in km or in miles*) which can be travelled before the next oil change.
When the distance is less than 1500 km or 1000 miles or when 22 months have elapsed, the spanner flashes for 30 seconds when the ignition is switched on or when the Mileage before oil change page is displayed on the ADAC. The spanner flashes permanently if the range falls to 0 or after 24 months.
To reset the mileage to next oil change,– switch on the ignition,– select the "fuel range" page on the ADAC,– press the Reset button for approximately 5 seconds,– the range flashes for 4 seconds then remains
permanently lit,– release the Reset button when the corresponding
value appears.
– Cruising speed
If the vehicle has the cruise control or speed limiter function, the display shows the cruising speed in km/h or mph*. The screen returns to an ADAC page after approximately 15 seconds.
13141k
If the function is not fitted, the ADAC page is inaccessible.
Every time the cruising speed is changed, this page replaces the ADAC page selected (refer to the "cruise control/speed limiter" section).
IMPORTANT: if flashing dashes appear on the on-board computer, a fault has been detected. Refer to the Fault finding procedure
* UK version.
INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83
83-15
FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE
To access the fault finding procedure, press and hold the ADAC button on the end of the wiper stalk, with the ignition on but the engine not running.
– All the warning lights illuminate and the needles on the four gauges move in steps.
– The liquid crystal display test appears
13141l
All the segments on the display should be lit up.
To go to the next test, press the ADAC button.
– The amount of fuel remaining in the tank test appears
13141m
The value displayed should correspond to the amount of fuel remaining in the tank in litres (even for the UK version).
To go to the next test, press the ADAC button.
– The fuel flow in litres / hour test appears (engine running).
13141N
A value should be displayed when the engine is running.
To go to the next test, press the ADAC button.
– Viewing stored faults.
13141o
If the letter t is displayed, this means that an injection signal fault has been stored for at least 4 seconds.
If the letter J is displayed, this means that a fault has been detected on the fuel gauge (disconnected for more than 100 seconds). The resistance should be between 5 and 350 ohms.
If the letter d is displayed, this means that an injection signal fault has been detected.
If the letter h is displayed, this means that an oil level sensor fault has been detected. The resistance should be between 6 and 20 ohms.
If only fixed dashes are displayed, this means that no faults have been detected.
Press the Reset button to exit the fault finding procedure and erase any stored faults.
IMPORTANT:– The on-board computer shows a fault by displaying
flashing dashes.– If no information is received from the injection
computer via the multiplex network, the fuel gauge, current consumption and fuel range functions do not work.
– If no information is received from the ABS computer via the multiplex network, the mileometer and mileage to next oil change functions will not work.
INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELBottom of the range instrument panel 83
83-16
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION GEAR ENGAGED (depending on version)
The automatic transmission position display is specific to this function. It is used to display:– the gear engaged,– automatic transmission Fault warning light,– the Shift lock symbol.
INSTRUMENT PANELTop of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELTop of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELTop of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELTop of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELTop of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELTop of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELTop of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELTop of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELTop of the range instrument panel 83
83-17
Top of the range instrument panel
GENERAL
The top of the range instrument panel contains the following functions:
– needle gauge function (same as on the bottom of the range version):! vehicle speed! rev counter! coolant temperature! fuel level
– audible function:! indicators! headlights on reminder (except voice synthesiser)! Renault Card in reader reminder (configurable)! automatic locking when driving confirmation! driver's seat position memory confirmation
(depending on version)! child safety fault warning! limit speed exceeded (Arabia) (depending on
version)! automatic headlight switch-on warning (depending
on version)! cruise control / speed limit warning (depending on
version)
– warning and indicator light function
– display function (same as on the bottom of the range version):! oil level reading! odometer! ADAC
– limit speed exceeded alarm (Arabia) (depending on version).
– symbol functions! card insertion! press on the start/stop button! SERVICE or STOP symbols! operating indicator! tyre pressures (refer to section 87)! automatic transmission gear engaged (depending
on version)! cruise control or speed limiter cruising speed
(depending on version)! automatic transmission gear engaged (depending
on version)
– cruise control/speed limiter (depending on version) (refer to cruise control/speed limiter section)
– voice synthesiser (depending on version) (in addition to the unit, refer to the voice synthesiser section)
– fault finding using the diagnostic tools.
NOTE: the oil service interval can be modified using the diagnostic tools by setting up communications with the injection computer.
NOTE: a page of the ADAC function can inhibit the display of the gear engaged and the Renault logo.
When the distance is less than 1500 km or 1000 miles or when 22 months have elapsed, the spanner flashes for 30 seconds when the ignition is switched on or when the mileage before oil change page is displayed on the ADAC. The spanner flashes permanently if the range reaches 0 or after 24 months.
To reset the mileage to next oil change,– switch on the ignition,– select the fuel range page on the ADAC,– press the reset button for approximately 5 seconds,– the range flashes for 4 seconds then remains
permanently lit,– release the reset button when the relevant value
appears.
INSTRUMENT PANELTop of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELTop of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELTop of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELTop of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELTop of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELTop of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELTop of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELTop of the range instrument panel 83INSTRUMENT PANELTop of the range instrument panel 83
83-18
FUNCTIONS SHOWN BY SYMBOLS
The large display is used to view certain functions. These functions are represented by symbols:! Insertion of the RENAULT Card! Monitored functions test phase
– coolant temperature status– low fuel warning– injection fault– automatic transmission fault– low screen wash level
! monitored functions ok! press on start/stop button! Stop warning light ! Service warning light! red Battery charge warning light flashes alternately
with the Stop warning light! red Oil pressure warning light flashes alternately
with the Stop warning light! red Coolant temperature warning light flashes
alternately with the Stop warning light (engine running for 20 seconds)
! amber preheating warning light! amber Low fuel warning light! amber injection fault warning light! amber automatic transmission fault warning light! amber low screen wash level warning light! display of the automatic transmission lever position! tyre pressures (refer to section 87)! cruise control or speed limiter cruising speed (refer to
section 83)
NOTE: this display can be deactivated using the ADAC menu scroll button if no faults are detected.
CONFIGURATION
Correct configurations must be set depending on the vehicle's equipment level:
– vehicle type:! Laguna (CF 072)! Other (CF 073)
– voice synthesiser language:! French (CF 066)! English (CF 073)! Italian (CF 075)! German (CF 074)! Spanish (CF 076)! Dutch (CF 077)! Portuguese (CF 078)! Turkish (CF 079)
– gearbox type:! manual gearbox (CF 031)! automatic transmission (CF 030)
– tyre pressure units:! pressure in bar (CF 069)! pressure in psi (CF 070)
– cruise control type:! without distance control (CF 067)! with distance control (not available) (CF 068)
NOTE: for the voice synthesiser to work correctly, the unit located under the dashboard must be correctly connected every time the battery is reconnected.
INSTRUMENT PANELSERVICE warning light 83INSTRUMENT PANELSERVICE warning light 83INSTRUMENT PANELSERVICE warning light 83INSTRUMENT PANELSERVICE warning light 83INSTRUMENT PANELSERVICE warning light 83INSTRUMENT PANELSERVICE warning light 83INSTRUMENT PANELSERVICE warning light 83INSTRUMENT PANELSERVICE warning light 83INSTRUMENT PANELSERVICE warning light 83SERVICE warning light
The SERVICE warning light (or the display on the top of the range instrument panel) may be lit up at the same time as the warning lights:
! anti-lock braking system,! air bag,! windshield washer (only on bottom of the range instrument panel),! electronic stability program (only on bottom of the range instrument panel),! tyre pressure monitoring system (only on bottom of the range instrument panel).
In fact, if any of these functions becomes faulty, the warning light for the function is accompanied by the SERVICE warning light.
The SERVICE warning light (or the display on the top of the range instrument panel may be lit up to indicate:
! a fault in the childproof lock system,! a fault in the variable power assisted steering function,! a fault in the steering column lock function,! a fault in the after ignition relay,! a fault in the wiper management system,! an oil level alert (until the plus after ignition is switched off),! the loss of the frame between the UCH and the instrument panel. the reappearance of the frame or switching the
ignition off turns off the warning light,! a fault on the emergency brake assist system.
For top of the range instrument panels with voice synthesiser, the SERVICE display appears:
! after detection of a fault with the lights or number plate lighting,! after detection of a fault in the left or right brake lights.
NOTE: in the case of absence of anti-locking frame on the multiplex network for over 4 seconds, the anti-locking warning light alone will light up. The SERVICE warning light will not light up.
83-19
INSTRUMENT PANELDisplay 83INSTRUMENT PANELDisplay 83INSTRUMENT PANELDisplay 83INSTRUMENT PANELDisplay 83INSTRUMENT PANELDisplay 83INSTRUMENT PANELDisplay 83INSTRUMENT PANELDisplay 83INSTRUMENT PANELDisplay 83INSTRUMENT PANELDisplay 83
83-20
Display
GENERAL
Depending on vehicle equipment, two models of display can be fitted:! a "bottom of the range" display comprising the
following functions:– door closure warning light– tyre pressure reading– radio display– seat belt reminder warning light
! a top of the range display for Carminat navigation comprising the following functions:– navigation– tyre pressure monitoring
REMOVAL
! bottom of the range: the support is clipped onto the dashboard. Both displays are clipped onto the support.
! top of the range: the support is secured by two screws (see the Carminat navigation section)
SPECIAL NOTES
When the external temperature is between -3˚C and +3˚C, the ˚C symbol may flash.
18830
18468
INSTRUMENT PANELDisplay 83INSTRUMENT PANELDisplay 83INSTRUMENT PANELDisplay 83INSTRUMENT PANELDisplay 83INSTRUMENT PANELDisplay 83INSTRUMENT PANELDisplay 83INSTRUMENT PANELDisplay 83INSTRUMENT PANELDisplay 83INSTRUMENT PANELDisplay 83
83-21
ALLOCATION OF TRACKS
Track allocation only relates to the bottom of the range display. For the top of the range display, refer to section 88: Carminat navigation.
15 track green connector
15 track red connector
15 track grey connector
18537
Track Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Multiplex connection
Not used
Multiplex connection
Not used
Earth
+ after ignition
Seat belt contact
Tyre pressure signal (grey)
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Track Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Radio control connection (track B1)
Radio control connection (track A3)
Radio control connection (track B2)
Radio control connection (track B3)
Radio control connection (track A2)
Radio control connection (track A1)
Not used
Track Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
External temperature
External temperature
Tyre pressure signal (green)
Not used
Earth
Lighting
Lighting supply (dimmer)
+ accessories
Battery +
External temperature sensor
Earth (radio track 6)
Radio on information (radio track 5)
Radio connection (track 1)
Radio connection (track 2)
Radio connection (track 3)
INSTRUMENT PANELFuel level sensor 83INSTRUMENT PANELFuel level sensor 83INSTRUMENT PANELFuel level sensor 83INSTRUMENT PANELFuel level sensor 83INSTRUMENT PANELFuel level sensor 83INSTRUMENT PANELFuel level sensor 83INSTRUMENT PANELFuel level sensor 83INSTRUMENT PANELFuel level sensor 83INSTRUMENT PANELFuel level sensor 83
83-22
Fuel level sensor
CONNECTION
NOTE: refer to section 19 for the removal/refitting method.
Checking
Ensure that the resistance varies when the float is moved.
NOTE: all the above values are given merely as an indication.
DI8307
TRACK Description
A1
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
Fuel level information
Not in use
Fuel sender -
Not in use
Fuel pump +
Fuel pump -
LevelResistance (+/- 10 Ω)
Effective volume
(+/- 5 litres)
Tank full 20Ω 70
Tank 3/4 full 87.5 Ω 54
Tank half full 155Ω 38
Tank 1/4 full 222.5 Ω 23
Tank empty 290 Ω 7
INSTRUMENT PANELOil level sensor 83INSTRUMENT PANELOil level sensor 83INSTRUMENT PANELOil level sensor 83INSTRUMENT PANELOil level sensor 83INSTRUMENT PANELOil level sensor 83INSTRUMENT PANELOil level sensor 83INSTRUMENT PANELOil level sensor 83INSTRUMENT PANELOil level sensor 83INSTRUMENT PANELOil level sensor 83
83-23
Oil level sensor
OPERATION
The sensor consists of a wire with a high resistivity. When a current passes through the wire it does not have the same thermal conductivity when it is immersed in a liquid as when it is in the open air.
After a fixed time a voltage difference is obtained at the sensor terminals depending on the depth of immersion of the wire. This voltage difference is processed by the instrument panel computer which then displays the level and also controls the low oil level warning light on the central display.
When the ignition is switched on, the central display shows the message oil ok for approximately 30 seconds before switching to the mileometer function.
NOTE: if a short circuit or an open circuit is detected when the oil level is measured, the display will immediately show the mileometer function.
If the battery voltage is less than 8 volts, the level will not be displayed.
CHECKING
The sensor resistance must be between 6 and 20 ohms.
The sensor is deemed to be in short circuit for a value lower than 3 ohms.
The sensor is deemed to be in open circuit for a value higher than approximately 20 ohms.
LOCATION
Example: F engine
18665
INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83
83-24
Voice synthesiser
GENERAL
The voice synthesiser is only present on the top of the range instrument panel (dual display). The bottom of the range instrument panel cannot provide messages.
The voice synthesiser function is performed by three components:! the instrument panel which processes the message
conditions and selects the language,! the voice synthesiser unit which process the signal
from the instrument panel and issues the message,! the voice synthesiser speaker.
The instrument panel and the voice synthesiser unit are connected via the vehicle's multiplex network.
The radio mute function is performed by a wire from the voice synthesiser unit. A signal from the voice synthesiser can be interrupted by a message from the navigation system, telephone, etc which has priority.
If the vehicle has the navigation function, messages pass through the Central Communication Unit. If the Central Communication Unit is disconnected, no messages are sent.
The message volume changes in steps, depending on engine speed.
NOTE: when the Discreet key is pressed, messages are replaced by an audible signal.
ConfigurationOne of the eight available languages has to be selected:
! French (CF 066)! English (CF 073)! Italian (CF 078)! German (CF 074)! Spanish (CF 076)! Dutch (CF 077)! Portuguese (CF 078)! Turkish (CF 079)
NOTE: if the voice synthesiser unit is not connected to the battery connection, the instrument panel does not recognise the function and uses the "without voice synthesiser" configuration.
18546
18832
INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83
83-25
ALLOCATION OF TRACKS
Voice synthesiser unit connection
15 track red connector
Voice synthesiser speaker
Discreet and Repeat keys
NOTE: the Repeat and Discreet keys and the door and window opening signals are linked to the instrument panel (refer to Sections 83 and 84).
18546
Track Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Earth
Permanent +
+ After ignition
Not in use
Not in use
Multiplex connection (instrument panel)
Multiplex connection (instrument panel)
Not in use
Not in use
Radio mute output
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Voice synthesiser speaker
Voice synthesiser speaker
18462
18461
INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83
83-26
Message condition
Types of spoken messages Issue condition Fault detected by
Welcome, I am the on-board computer, the monitoring system is operational.
press the repeat key if no faults are detected
_
The rear left hand door is not closed The rear right hand door is not closed The front left hand door is not closed The front right hand door is not closed The boot is not closed The bonnet is not closed
ignition on vehicle speed ≥ 10 mph (15 km/h) fault for 1 second
UCH by the multiplex network
(except bonnet)
Opening contact (for bonnet)
Driver's seat belt not fastenedvehicle speed ≥ 15 mph (25 km/h)distance travelled ≥ 500 mfault for 1 second
Seat belt contact (earthed)
Headlights onignition switched off side lights on driver's door open
UCH by the multiplex network
Side lights faulty* Number plate lights faulty*
ignition on side lights on fault for 4 seconds
UCH by the multiplex network
Right hand stop light faulty* Left hand stop light faulty*
ignition on brake pedal pressed fault for 2 seconds
UCH by the multiplex network
Battery charging faultengine running ≥ 400 rpmfault for 10 seconds
On-board electronics
Handbrake onvehicle speed ≥ 10 mph (15 km/h)handbrake on
Handbrake switch
INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83
83-27
Low screen wash levelignition on fault for 30 seconds
Low screen wash sensor (earthed)
Low fuel level, limited range ignition on fuel level calculated at less than 7 litres
Instrument panel electronics
Low oil level, check level soon *ignition on
On-board electronics
Fall in oil pressure, stop the vehicle, switch off the ignition and refer to driver's handbook
Engine speed ≥ 1600 rpmOil pressure warning
Oil pressure switch
Engine overheating, stop the vehicle, do not work on a hot engine, refer to driver's handbook
engine running ≥ 20 secondscoolant temperature warning
Injection temperature sensor
(injection computer)
Injection fault severity 1 Injection fault severity 2
engine running ≥ 7 secondsengine speed ≥ 400 rpminjection fault
Injection computer by multiplex network
Antipollution monitoring, faulty operation, contact your Renault dealer
ignition on injection fault
Injection computer by multiplex network
Abnormal operation of the variable power assisted steering has been detected, contact your Renault dealer
ignition on power assisted steering fault
UCH by the multiplex network
Emergency brake assist system faulty, contact your Renault dealer
ignition on emergency brake assist system fault
Injection computerABS computer
INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83
83-28
Brake circuit faulty, avoid sudden braking, stop the vehicle, contact your Renault dealer
Igntion onbrake fluid low fault for 5 seconds or anti-lock braking system fault for 5 seconds
Brake fluid level (contact to earth) or anti-lock braking
system computer
ABS faulty, normal braking in operation, contact your Renault dealer
ignition on ABS computer fault
Anti-lock braking system computer
by multiplex network
ESP fault ignition on ESP fault
Anti-lock braking system computer
by multiplex network
Deactivation of traction control system ignition on ESP fault
Injection computerAnti-lock braking system
computer by multiplex network
Transmission, safety operation, contact your Renault dealer
ignition on automatic transmission fault
Automatic gearbox computer
by multiplex network
Transmission, excessive oil temperature, refer to driver's handbook
ignition on automatic transmission fault
Automatic gearbox computer
by multiplex network
Engine immobiliser system, faulty operation, contact your Renault dealer
ignition on UCH by the multiplex network
INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83INSTRUMENT PANELVoice synthesiser 83
83-29
* The Service warning light is on during these messages until the ignition is switched off. Stored messages may be accessed by pressing the Repeat button.
Front right hand tyre over-inflated or under-inflated Rear right hand tyre over-inflated or under-inflated Front left hand tyre over-inflated or under-inflated Rear left hand tyre over-inflated or under-inflated
ignition on pressure fault
UCHPressure sensor
Front left hand tyre very deflated Front right hand tyre very deflated Rear right hand tyre very deflated Rear left hand tyre very deflated Front left hand tyre punctured Front right hand tyre punctured Rear right hand tyre punctured Rear left hand tyre punctured
ignition on pressure fault
UCHPressure sensor
Tyre pressure not monitored on at least one tyreignition on sensor fault
UCHPressure sensor
Automatic door locking activeAutomatic door locking not active
ignition onUCH by the multiplex
network
Child proof fault ignition onUCH by the multiplex
network
INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83
83-30
Cruise control/Speed limiter
DESCRIPTION
1 Switch with three positions (off / cruise control / speed limiter)2 Switches at the steering wheel3 Instrument panel4 Injection computer5 Accelerator pedal potentiometer6 Brake switch (dual contact)7 Clutch switch (start of travel)8 Automatic gearbox computer (depending on version)9 ABS computer10 Motorised throttle unit (petrol engine)
INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83
83-31
Cruise control/Speed limiter
GENERAL
The cars are fitted with two functions:! the Cruise control option allows the driver to
maintain a speed he has selected. This function can be deactivated at any moment by pressing the brake pedal or the clutch pedal, or by using one of the system buttons.
! the speed limiter allows the driver to set a speed limit. The accelerator pedal will not function above the set speed. The speed limit selected can be exceeded at any time by pressing the accelerator pedal beyond its point of resistance.
1 cruise control2 speed limiter
Both functions are controlled by the injection computer. This computer exchanges signals with the automatic transmission computer and the instrument panel. It applies the reference values by acting on the motorised throttle valve unit (see section 17).
NOTES: flashing by the ADAC page or display screen warns the driver that the desired cruise control speed cannot be maintained (e.g. if the car is driving downhill).
18832
INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83
83-32
DESCRIPTION
the ABS computer:! sends the car speed signal,! sends the depressed brake pedal signal,
the automatic transmission computer:! sends the gear engaged signal,
the instrument panel:! displays the reference value (cruise control or speed
limiter) (see the instrument panelsection),! switches on a two-colour indicator light (green for
cruise control, amber for speed limiter)
Each time these functions are switched on, the on-board computer display (bottom of the range model) or the large display unit (top of the range) moves on to the next screen.
NOTE: the cruise control/speed limiter functions have no indicator lights.
the following controls are fitted:! a three position switch (off/cruise control/speed
limiter)! steering wheel switches that can be used to adjust
the desired speed, cancel the function or recall the stored speed,
! accelerator pedal switches that are used to control the injection and the brake lights,
! a clutch switch (according to model) that is used only for the cruise control function.
NOTES:– the car has two clutch sensors (an end travel sensor
used when starting the engine and a start travel sensor used for the cruise control function).
– the accelerator pedal must incorporate a point of resistance at the end of its travel.
the injection computer:! receives signals from the accelerator pedal,! receives a signal from the brake switch,! receives a signal from the clutch engager switch
(according to model),! receives signals from the three position switch,! receives signals from the steering wheel switches,! receives signals from the ABS computer,! receives signals from the automatic transmission
computer.! sends signals to the instrument panel! controls the motorised throttle unit or the diesel
injection output.
INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83
83-33
Components1 Three position switch (off/cruise control/speed limiter)2 Steering wheel switch3 Accelerator pedal4 Instrument panel5 Clutch switch (according to model) (start of travel),6 Brake pedal switch7 The automatic transmission computer (according to model),8 ABS computer9 Injection computer
INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83
83-34
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATION
Input conditions:– switch must be at Cruise control,– car must be in 2nd gear, detected by the computers,– speed must be between 18 mph (30 km/h) minimum
and 120 mph (200km/h) maximum,– green cruise control light must be switched on,– the +, - or Resume keys must be pressed.
Output conditions:– accelerator pedal must be depressed – brake or clutch pedal must be depressed– the 0 key must be depressed– switch must be at off– electronic stability program system must be switched
on– injection computer must be switched on,– no gear should be engaged.
Depressing the accelerator pedal switches the system off temporarily. Release the accelerator to switch back on.
N.B.: a flashing speed setting warns the driver that the set speed cannot be maintained.
SPEED LIMITER OPERATION
Input conditions:– switch must be at Speed limiter,– car must be in 2nd gear, detected by the computers,– speed must be between 18 mph (30 km/h) minimum
and 120 mph (200 km/h) maximum,– amber speed limiter light must be switched on,– the +, - or Resume keys must be pressed.
Output conditions:– accelerator must be pressed quickly (beyond point of
resistance)– switch must be at off– electronic stability program system must be switched
on– injection computer must be switched on– the 0 key must be depressed
Depressing the accelerator pedal switches the system off temporarily. Release the accelerator to switch back on.
INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83
83-35
Connector allocations
Three-position switch
Steering wheel switches
A Resume key = approximately 900 ohmsB Cancel key = 0 ohmC + key = approximately 300 ohmsD + key = approximately 100 ohms
NOTE: for information on removing the on switch, see the instrument panel section.
18461
TRACK Description
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
+ side lights
+ After ignition feed (shut-down circuit)
Cruise control On/Off switch
Speed limiter On/Off switch
Earth
Not in use
18554
18554
INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83
83-36
Accelerator pedal
The accelerator has a point of resistance.
Track 1 resistance = 1200 ± 480 ohms.Track 2 resistance = 1700 ± 680 ohms.
IMPORTANT: the car must be fitted with an accelerator pedal incorporating a hard point at the travel mid-point.
Brake switch (double)
The cruise control function uses the open contact (together with the lights), while the ABS computer uses the closed sensor.
The two signals are compared by the injection computer.
When the switch is fitted on the pedal, pull on the pushrod to take up the play.
17785R
TRACK Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
Potentiometer earth 2
Potentiometer earth 1
Potentiometer pedal signal 1
Potentiometer supply 1
Potentiometer supply 2
Potentiometer pedal signal 2
TRACK Description
A1
A3
B1
B3
Close contact
Open contact
Open contact
Close contact
INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83
83-37
Clutch switch
The clutch pedal has two contacts:! a start of travel contact (1) that is used only for the
cruise control function (grey connector),! an end of travel contact (2) used for the starter
function (blue connector).
When the switch is fitted on the pedal, pull on the pushrod to take up the play.
INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83INSTRUMENT PANELCruise control/Speed limiter 83
83-38
REPLACING THE INJECTION COMPUTER
When the injection computer has been replaced, it must be reprogrammed with the cruise control and speed limiter functions.
This is done by simply pressing the function switches on the dashboard. Confirm using the fault finding tools:
To configure using the fault finding tool:! without proximity control.! with proximity control (not available)
INSTRUMENT PANELCARMINAT navigation system 83INSTRUMENT PANELCARMINAT navigation system 83INSTRUMENT PANELCARMINAT navigation system 83INSTRUMENT PANELCARMINAT navigation system 83INSTRUMENT PANELCARMINAT navigation system 83INSTRUMENT PANELCARMINAT navigation system 83INSTRUMENT PANELCARMINAT navigation system 83INSTRUMENT PANELCARMINAT navigation system 83INSTRUMENT PANELCARMINAT navigation system 83
83-39
CARMINAT navigation system
GENERAL
The Carminat system comprises a screen and a voice synthesiser to provide guidance for the driver.
This system can:
! find a specific location, such as:– a road, street or avenue– a hotel– a public service building (library, hospital etc.)– a garage or petrol station.– etc.
! select guidance modes in order to:– optimise journey time– select the shortest distance– plan a route travelling on main roads– or take the scenic route
Each mode is symbolised by a different icon that appears on the status line on the lower part of the screen.
! store addresses in the address book.
! display road maps of:– the present location– or the destination
! display the journey time
! receive signals from the traffic information system
N.B.: for information on operating the system and descriptions of the various menus, refer to the driver's handbook.
MULTIPLEX CONNECTIONS
The car is fitted with a multiplex network that is shared with the other main computer units for the exchange of information. The Carminat system uses the Car speed signal provided by the ABS computer to calculate the distance travelled along with the Reversing signal. (see section 88 Multiplexing).
A multiplex network used exclusively by the Carminat system links the navigation computer to the Central Communication Unit and the display.
This system uses the following to function:
! a Central Communication Unit (CCU) fitted with a console,
! an electronic navigation computer comprising acceleration sensors (gyroscope) and a CD-ROM reader,
! a satellite link (GPS aerial) that can locate the car,
! a screen to display written data and maps,
! a speaker for giving voice instructions,
! a CD ROM with the maps of the country the car is delivered to.
NOTE:
! If the car has been transported by train or ferry, the navigation system may need a few minutes to find its exact location (see section on Re-location)
! If the car battery has been disconnected, the system may need up to 15 minutes to calculate its exact location. The car must be outdoors, with the navigation system switched on, in order to pick up satellite signals with the GPS aerial.
! The system can also operate without valid GPS data. Under these circumstances, precision may be lost when it comes to pinpointing exact locations.
! Once the exact position has been located by the GPS system, the on-screen satellite symbol turns from red to green.
! When travelling on the motorway, the distance data provided by the system to indicate exits will differ from the information on the signs. This is because motorway signs calculate distance from the start of the motorway exit, while the CARMINAT system calculates from the end of the exit.
INSTRUMENT PANELCARMINAT navigation system 83INSTRUMENT PANELCARMINAT navigation system 83INSTRUMENT PANELCARMINAT navigation system 83INSTRUMENT PANELCARMINAT navigation system 83INSTRUMENT PANELCARMINAT navigation system 83INSTRUMENT PANELCARMINAT navigation system 83INSTRUMENT PANELCARMINAT navigation system 83INSTRUMENT PANELCARMINAT navigation system 83INSTRUMENT PANELCARMINAT navigation system 83
83-40
DIAGRAM
1 a Central Communication Unit (CCU) fitted with a console 2 Console3 Carminat computer (CD-ROM reader) 4 Screen5 Seat belt information (for display)6 External temperature information (for display)7 Radio8 Voice synthesiser speaker.9 Steering wheel radio control10 Radio aerial11 Radio connection (mute)12 Car's multiplex connection13 GPS aerial
INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83INSTRUMENT PANEL 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83
83-41
Carminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit
CENTRAL COMMUNICATION UNIT
In order to function correctly, the Carminat system must be accompanied by a Central Communication Unit. This element is located above the radio and includes a console.
The Central Communication Unit can:! automatically adjust the clock,! act as a go-between for the car's multiplex network
and the Carminat system network,! use multiplex data (car speed, reversing information,
external temperature etc.)! control the radio from the steering wheel,! control braking conditions, and the car and system
configurations,! control the on-screen displays,! receive signals from the Traffic information system,! control message requests to the voice synthesiser.
CONSOLE
The console is an integral part of the Central Communication Unit. It comprises:
! Rotary knob A, used for: – selecting different menus,– validating,
! Button B, used for: – scrolling through the menu in manual mode,– select options in the different menus,
! Menu button M, used for: – returning to the previous menu,
! Button I, used for: – repeating the message,
! Button C, used for: – switching off the voice synthesiser.
! the (+) and (-) keys, used for increasing or decreasing the message volume.
18459
18459
INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83INSTRUMENT PANEL 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83
83-42
Carminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit
REMOVAL/REFITTING
The CCU can be removed with the Ms 1373 radio removal tools.
Connector allocations
15 track connector A (red):
30 track connector B (grey):
IMPORTANT: The system must be initialised after the CCU has been removed and refitted.
18457
TRACK Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Radio control satellite (track B1)
Radio control satellite (track A3)
Radio control satellite (track B2)
Radio control satellite (track B3)
Radio control satellite (track A2)
Radio control satellite (track A1)
Not in use
TRACK Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Not in use
Aerial amplifier
Multiplex connection (multimedia)
Multiplex connection (multimedia)
Not in use
Not in use
On/Off signal output
Carminat speaker input
Carminat speaker input
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
External temperature signal
External temperature earth
Not in use
Vehicle speed
On/Off signal
External temperature sensor
Not in use
Not in use
Seat belt indicator light
+ lighting
Radio connection (track 6)
Radio On/Off (track 5)
Radio connection (track 3)
Radio connection (track 1)
Radio connection (track 2)
INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83INSTRUMENT PANEL 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit 83
83-43
Carminat navigation system: Central Communication Unit
D and E: radio aerial input and output for the traffic information system.
30 track connector C (green):
IMPORTANT: The system must be initialised after the CCU has been removed and refitted.
18457
TRACK Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Multiplex connection (car)
Multiplex connection (car)
Radio mute control
+ accessories
before ignition
Voice synthesiser mute control (radio)
Earth
+ after ignition
Speaker input (voice synthesiser unit)
Speaker input (voice synthesiser unit)
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Speaker output (voice synthesiser)
Speaker output (voice synthesiser)
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
Not in use
INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: computer 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: computer 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: computer 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: computer 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: computer 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: computer 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: computer 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: computer 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: computer 83
83-44
Carminat navigation system: computer
ELECTRONIC NAVIGATION COMPUTER (CD ROM reader)
This system operates by using sensors which detect the car's movements. The car's tachometric sensor calculates the distance travelled while the gyroscope (inert compass) in the computer registers the movements made when the car turns bends and corners.
By making comparisons with the digital menu (on the CD-ROM), the system corrects inaccuracies, (tyre pressure and wear, temperature etc.) in order to pinpoint the car's location.
IMPORTANT: After replacing the electronic navigation computer or disconnecting the battery, initialise the system and re-locate the car (see sections on re-location and initialise).
The system will be programmed in French by default after the electronic navigation computer has been replaced.
To change the language, refer to the Change of languagesection.
WARNING: a new electronic navigation system will not be able to recall addresses stored in the old unit.
NOTE:– with the ignition off, the CD-ROM reader lights up
automatically when the eject button is pressed and will remain lit for about a minute if ignition is not switched on.
– The reader lights up automatically when the ignition is turned on,
– After the ignition is turned off, the reader remains lit for approximately 40 seconds. The battery should not be disconnected until the light has gone out.
IMPORTANT: The system must be initialised after any operation on the navigation computer.
REMOVAL/REFITTING
With the ignition off, remove:! the cover of the glove compartment secured by a
screw,! the two mounting bolts of the computer support,
Disconnect the connectors and pull out the unit.
Detach the support from the computer using the Ms. 1373. radio removal tools.
WARNING: the GPS aerial wire is very fragile. Do not bend or trap it.
18473
19306
INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: computer 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: computer 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: computer 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: computer 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: computer 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: computer 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: computer 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: computer 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: computer 83
83-45
CONNECTIONS
18 track connector (to the Central Communications Unit):
16 track connector (tow the screen):
19307
TRACK Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
+ Before ignition
Not in use
Speaker
Not in use
Not in use
On/Off
Not in use
Not in use
Multiplex connection (multimedia)
Earth
Not in use
Speaker
Not in use
Not in use
Vehicle speed signal
Not in use
Not in use
Multiplex connection (multimedia)
TRACK Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Not in use
Earth
- Video signal
Red video signal
Green video signal
Blue video signal
Earth
Video synchronisation signal
Earth
Brightness adjustment
Not in use
Display On/Off
Not in use
Not in use
+ Before ignition
+ Before ignition
INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: screen 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: screen 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: screen 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: screen 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: screen 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: screen 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: screen 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: screen 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: screen 83
83-46
Carminat navigation system: screen
SCREEN
It is used to display:– the various menus,– the route to the destination– the distance from the destination– the journey maps– distance remaining until the next change of direction– the road maps– etc.
It turns on a few seconds after the ignition is switched on:! If the screen was on when the ignition was last
switched off, only the external temperature, the clock, the radio display (if it was switched on) and the tyre pressure data will be present. To switch on the CARMINAT system, turn the console knob and a command menu will appear. Push the knob to confirm OK and the Contents menu will appear.
! If the CARMINAT system was on when the ignition was last switched off, the external temperature, the clock, the radio display (if it was switched on), the tyre pressure data and the command menu will be present. Push the knob to confirm OK and the Contents menu will appear and the CARMINAT system can now be switched on.
It will switch off completely approximately 40 seconds after the ignition is switched off.
NOTE:! the brightness of the screen can be varied by using
the + and - brightness buttons on the console. Options:– daytime (side lights off)– night time (side lights on)
! The colour of the screen can be varied using the Adjustment key followed by the Screen configuration key. Options:– daytime blue or dark blue (side lights off).– night time blue or dark blue (side lights on).
Special notes for radio
If the car is fitted with an original radio, the display will appear on the screen bar (radio on only).
This can be changed so that the radio display fills the whole screen, to ensure greater visibility.
IMPORTANT: if the screen does not display radio information, initialise the system.
Special notes for clock
The satellite links (GPS) sets the clock automatically.
The time displayed can be changed using the Time adjustment menu, which appears after selecting the Adjustment menu. Options:– time format = displays 12 or 24 hour clock,– time adjustment = changes the car clock time in
relation to the satellite time,– time lapse = shows the time difference between the
car clock and the satellite time.
Thus, after the battery or the navigation system have been disconnected, do not use the Time adjustment function to set the clock. Instead, take the car outdoors (ensuring that the satellite link is in good working order) to receive satellite time. If this is not done, the time difference will be added to the time given by the satellite link.
IMPORTANT: do not use cleaning products to clean the screen. It should be wiped with a soft, dry cloth or a damp cloth.
INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: screen 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: screen 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: screen 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: screen 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: screen 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: screen 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: screen 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: screen 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: screen 83
83-47
REMOVAL/REFITTING
With the ignition off, remove:! the two covers either side of the screen,! the mounting bolts (1),! unclip the screen cap.
Disconnect the connection with the computer.
Remove the mounting bolts (2) from the screen in order to detach it from the support.
CONNECTIONS
18468
18470
18470
TRACK Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Shielding
Not in use
Earth
- Video signal
Red video signal
Green video signal
Blue video signal
Earth
Video synchronisation signal
Earth
Brightness adjustment
Not in use
Display On/Off
Display supply
Not in use
+ 12 volts
+ 12 volts
Earth shielding
INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Aerial 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Aerial 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Aerial 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Aerial 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Aerial 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Aerial 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Aerial 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Aerial 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Aerial 83
83-48
Carminat navigation system: Aerial
GPS/GSM AERIAL (single band)
It picks up satellite signals to allow the electronic navigation computer (CD-ROM reader) to locate the position of the car. (A)
Good satellite reception by the GPS aerial is indicated on the display screen by three green bars.
Poor satellite reception (caused by going through a tunnel or along a street hemmed in by tall buildings etc.) is indicated by three red bars on the display screen.
NOTE:The car must be re-located after the electronic navigation computer has been replaced or the battery disconnected. Drive the car to a well-exposed area outdoors and wait for a few minutes with the ignition switched on. Good satellite reception by the GPS aerial is indicated on the display screen by three green bars.
WARNING: the GPS aerial wire is very fragile. Do not bend or trap it.
NOTE:some cars can be fitted with a dual band GSM aerial and a GPS aerial, located under the roof, behind the lining.
REMOVAL/REFITTING
Remove the upper tailgate lining.
Disconnect the aerial connectors (B).
Remove the mounting bolts (C) and the GPS aerial (A).
19246
19247
INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Re-locating/change of language 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Re-locating/change of language 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Re-locating/change of language 83INSTRUMENT PANEL 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Re-locating/change of language 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Re-locating/change of language 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Re-locating/change of language 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Re-locating/change of language 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Re-locating/change of language 83
83-49
Carminat navigation system: Re-locating/change of language
INITIALISING
This operation must be performed every time a device is used for the first time.
IMPORTANT: if the car is fitted with a radio, it must be in use when initialising takes place. If it is not, the steering wheel radio control will not function and the screen will not display radio data.
1 Wait for the system to stop,2 Switch the radio on,3 Press the M and C buttons at the same time,4 Insert the RENAULT Card to the Auxiliaries
position,5 Read the configuration,6 Carry out the steering wheel radio control test,7 Check that the aerials are present.
RE-LOCATING
The car has to be re-located after the electronic navigation computer has been replaced or the battery disconnected.
! Drive the car to an open area outdoors and wait for a few minutes with the ignition switched on. Good satellite reception by the GPS aerial is indicated on the display screen by three green bars. The car is now located.
If the car is not shown in the correct location on the map, it has to be re-located:! The re-location can be done:
– Automatically by driving along different main roads stored in the car maps for up to 2 miles (1 to 3 km).
– Manually by using the car position menu after selecting the adjustments menu. Enter the appropriate town, road and junction.Confirm Re-location at junction.
CHANGING THE MESSAGE LANGUAGE
The system will be programmed in French by default after the electronic navigation computer has been replaced.
To change the language, use the language CD supplied to the customer with the Carminat handbook and follow the instructions described below:
NOTE: The navigation system language and the message language are altered in different ways.
1. With the ignition switched on, press the eject button to remove the electronic navigation computer map CD
2. The screen will display the message No CD in the reader.
3. Confirm OK by pressing the knob.
4. Select the Settings menu followed by Language and other language.
5. The system will tell you to insert the language CD.
6. Insert the CD, confirm and then press the knob. Confirm.
7. Select the language to be replaced (language 1 or 2) by turning the knob.
8. Select the correct language to load from the list of available languages stored on the CD, confirm and then confirm Load.
9. Wait a few seconds. The screen will turn black and then white and display a message in black and red with a horizontal bar to show the loading time remaining.
10. When loading is complete, the language CD will be ejected from the reader and the screen will read OK.
11. Switch off the ignition and wait for the screen to turn blank (this takes just over a minute). The new language is now loaded.
12. Re-insert the map CD into the reader.
INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Fault finding 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Fault finding 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Fault finding 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Fault finding 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Fault finding 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Fault finding 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Fault finding 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Fault finding 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Fault finding 83
83-50
Carminat navigation system: Fault finding
COMPLETE FAULT FINDING
In the event of problems occuring in the system, a fault finding function allows potential faults stored in the computer to be displayed on the screen. It can also check some of the parameters.
The screen turns on a few seconds after the ignition is switched on. Confirm OK and the screen will display a number of options:1. Navigation
⇒ Settings can:! select a language,! select guidance criteria,! alter screen configuration,! receive system information,! select the traffic information system,! change the units (km, miles, etc),! change the message volume,! configure the screen.
⇒ On-board computer displays:! the current speed,! the average speed,! distance remaining,! time remaining,! and allows the driver to set a speed limit.
2. Language: alters the language, screen and menus.
3. User settings:⇒ Clock: automatically adjusts or alters the clock
setting,⇒ System: the After Sales (code) menu is
displayed. Enter the code using the knob and then select and confirm the four access code digits. The code (reserved for the repair agent) is: 4112 (exit = return to the contents menu).! Exit: return to contents,! Fault finding (refer to following pages)! Configuration details. These can be requested
in the event of any problem occuring: ! date of manufacture! configuration: 0002,! UCC type: UCC 3,! software model: 051(for information),! reference! checksum.
! System tests: check various components such as the console, the radio control satellite and the multiplex connections,
! Operational tests: give specific information about the system,! RDS-TMC Test:
– frequency: TUNER for traffic information– reception level: %– RDS quality: %
! Car test: – car: X74– speed: OK,– + after ignition feed: OK (depending on
position of RENAULT Card)– + ACC: OK– tyre pressure monitoring system: OK – battery voltage,– crash signal: NOK (except accident)– + side light feed: lighting supply– reversing (depending on version),– external temperature.
INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Fault finding 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Fault finding 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Fault finding 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Fault finding 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Fault finding 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Fault finding 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Fault finding 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Fault finding 83INSTRUMENT PANELCarminat navigation system: Fault finding 83
83-51
COMPLETE FAULT FINDING
! READ GPS STATUSExample:– Sensor status: 3D position– Longitude: 2°14'24''East– Latitude: 48°46'31''North,– Height: 226 m,– No. of satellites: > 3 (needed for correct
functioning).
! READ E/S STATUS– Tachometric pulse: the car speed should be
displayed when the car is moving,– Temperature: the computer internal temperature
should be displayed,– Battery: the battery voltage should be displayed,– B. button:
0 = CD eject button pressed. 1 = CD eject button pressed (press and hold for just over 5 seconds)
– Direction: ARR = Gear lever in reverse, correct reverse signal AVA = Gear lever not in reverse or faulty reverse signal
– Lights = on or off (not in use)– Ext. contact 1: Not used– Ext contact 2: Not used
N.B.: time of response to a status change is approximately 15 seconds.
! IDENTIFICATION (for information)– Computer serial number– Product model– Software version– Week of manufacture– Year of manufacture– CBS software version
! FAULT MEMORY– Fault code,– Fault frequency,– Fault type,
Ignore the parameters as they are not operational.
! SIMULATION! CAR POSITION
NOTE: for the system to work correctly, you must exit the Simulation mode after use.
CONTROLS - SIGNALSRotary switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRotary switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRotary switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRotary switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRotary switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRotary switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRotary switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRotary switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRotary switch 84
84-1
184 CONTROLS - SIGNALSRotary switch
NOTE: locking the air bag computer also unlocks the electric steering column lock.
REMOVAL
Remove the steering wheel air bag cushion. To do this, insert a screwdriver into the hole (1) then move it upwards (2).
Disconnect the steering wheel air bag connectors (4) and the connectors of the cruise control buttons (according to model).
Remove:– the steering wheel bolts after setting the wheels
straight,– the steering wheel,– the dial surround,– the steering wheel half cowlings.
Disconnect the stalks (wipers, radio and lighting controls), the rotary switch connectors (air bag and cruise control).
Before removing the rotary switch assembly, mark its position:– ensuring that the wheels are straight at the time of
removal– checking that the 0 mark of the rotary switch is
correctly positioned opposite the index.
Undo the bolt then release the steering column assembly.
Remove the stalks by pressing on the tabs (3).
NOTE: is it not necessary to separate the sensor from the steering wheel (5)
IMPORTANT: all work on the air bag and pretensioner systems must be carried out by qualified personnel who have received the proper training.
WARNING: Handling the pyrotechnic systems (pretensioners or air bags) near a source of heat or a flame is forbidden; there is a risk of triggering.
18455
18313
18797
CONTROLS - SIGNALSRotary switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRotary switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRotary switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRotary switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRotary switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRotary switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRotary switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRotary switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRotary switch 84
84-2
REFITTING
Ensure that the wheels are straight. The rotary switch bolt cannot be tightened if the mark is at 0.
Special notes on the steering wheel
IMPORTANT: the splines on the steering wheel are designed so that the wheel can be fitted in one way only. The steering wheel should slip easily into the splines. Be careful not to damage them.
The steering wheel bolts must be replaced every time the steering wheel is removed and then tightened to a torque (of 4.4 daNm).
Special notes on the air bag
Connect the two steering wheel air bag connectors according to their colours.
Ensure the connectors click in properly.
18313
18835
IMPORTANT: before reconnecting the driver's air bag, the procedure for checking the correct operation of the system must be carried out:– check that the air bag indicator light on the
instrument panel lights up when the ignition is switched on (computer unlocked),
– Connect a dummy ignition module to the connector of each air bag and check that the indicator light switches off,
– switch off the ignition, connect the air bag in place of the dummy ignition modules and position it on the steering wheel,
– switch on the ignition and check that the indicator light turns on for 3 seconds and then turns off again.
If the indicator light does not switch off, refer to the fault finding section.
WARNING: If these instructions are not followed, the system may not operate normally and could even cause erratic triggering.
18994
CONTROLS - SIGNALSWiper control stalk 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSWiper control stalk 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSWiper control stalk 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSWiper control stalk 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSWiper control stalk 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSWiper control stalk 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSWiper control stalk 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSWiper control stalk 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSWiper control stalk 84
84-3
Wiper control stalk
CONNECTION (fullest version)
N.B.: The windscreen and rear screen wiper and washer controls can be checked using an ohmmeter.
Track Description
A1A2A3A4A5A6A7B1B2B3B4B5B6B7
Windscreen wiper interval controlWindscreen wiper high speed controlWindscreen wiper low speed controlWindscreen washer pump controlNot in useWindscreen wiper park position+ after ignitionRear screen washer pump controlRear screen wiper controlNot in use+ after ignitionEarthEngine speed informationADAC scroll button
Command : TracksValues (Ohms)
Windscreen washer pumpWindscreen wiper low speed controlWindscreen wiper high speed controlRear screen wiper intermittent control:
Position 1Position 2Position 3Position 4Position 5
Rear screen washer pumpRear screen wiper intermittent facilityADAC scroll button
A4/B4A3/A7A2/A7
A1/A7
B1/B4B2/B4B5/B7
0 0 0
9.6 7.2 4.8 2.4 0 0 0 0
CONTROLS - SIGNALSLighting stalk 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSLighting stalk 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSLighting stalk 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSLighting stalk 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSLighting stalk 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSLighting stalk 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSLighting stalk 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSLighting stalk 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSLighting stalk 84
84-4
Lighting stalk
CONNECTION (fullest version)
NOTE: The lighting controls can be checked using an ohmmeter.The horn control goes through connector C via the rotating connector.
Track Description
A1A2A3A4A5A6A7B1B2B3B4B5B6B7
Front fog lights relay supplyNot in useRear fog light controlHorn controlRight hand indicator controlEarthLH direction indicator controlSide lights+ battery feed (protected)+ battery feed (protected)Dipped headlights (dual lens)Dipped headlights (single lens)+ battery feed (protected)Main beam headlights
Command : Tracks (closed circuit)
LH direction indicatorRH direction indicatorSide lightsDipped headlights (dual lens)Dipped headlights (single lens)Main beam headlights (on or flash)Front fog lightsRear fog lights
A6/A7A5/A6B1/B2B3/B4B3/B5B6/B7A1/B2A3/B2
CONTROLS - SIGNALSRadio control satellite 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRadio control satellite 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRadio control satellite 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRadio control satellite 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRadio control satellite 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRadio control satellite 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRadio control satellite 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRadio control satellite 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRadio control satellite 84
84-5
Radio control satellite
CONNECTION
The steering wheel radio control is linked to:! the central display unit on the dashboard! the Central Communication Unit if the car is fitted with the Carminat
navigation system (see section 83).
Track Description
A1A2A3B1B2B3
Track 14Track 13Track 10Track 9
Track 11Track 12
CONTROLS - SIGNALSRain sensor 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRain sensor 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRain sensor 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRain sensor 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRain sensor 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRain sensor 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRain sensor 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRain sensor 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRain sensor 84
84-6
Rain sensor
NOTE: for information on operating the wipers, refer to section 85.
CONNECTION
Track Description
A1A2A3B1B2B3
UCH connection (in use relay)UCH connection (control)+ AccessoriesUCH connection (high speed relay)EarthUCH connection (automatic operation)
CONTROLS - SIGNALSRenault Card reader 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRenault Card reader 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRenault Card reader 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRenault Card reader 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRenault Card reader 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRenault Card reader 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRenault Card reader 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRenault Card reader 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRenault Card reader 84
84-7
Renault Card reader
CONNECTION
The Renault Card reader is clipped to its mounting.
The support is clipped to the dashboard.
NOTE: if a fault occurs on the reader lighting, the reader must be replaced.
REMINDER: the reader is not coded.
18320
Track Description
12345
6789
101112
UCH coded connectionReader supplyNot in useUCH coded connectionRenault Card presence signal (+Accessories)Radio frequency signal (remote control)Fully inserted Renault Card signalEarthNot in useNot in useNot in useRadio frequency signal (remote control)
CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric steering lock 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric steering lock 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric steering lock 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric steering lock 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric steering lock 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric steering lock 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric steering lock 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric steering lock 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric steering lock 84
84-8
Electric steering lock
ELECTRIC STEERING COLUMN LOCK
PRECAUTIONS DURING REPAIR
Proceed as follows to prevent the steering lock from being applied when the battery is disconnected:– Fully insert the Renault Card (+ after ignition feed)
then withdraw it to the 1st position, (+Accessories). The steering column is not locked for as long as the card remains in the 1st position in the reader. Disconnect the battery and the steering column will remain unlocked for as long as the battery remains disconnected and the RENAULT Card inserted.
– Lock the air bag computer using a fault finding tool.
REMOVAL
REFITTING
Tighten the bolt to a torque of 0.8 daNm.
To program the electric steering wheel lock code, see section 82.
CONNECTION
WARNING: the steering column lock is secured with a reverse thread bolt (left-hand thread). Furthermore, it can only be removed if it has been released beforehand.
18541
18466
Track Description
123456
EarthSupply (+12 volts accessories)Multiplex connectionUCH control (unlocking)Renault Card present signalMultiplex connection
CONTROLS - SIGNALSEngine start/stop button 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSEngine start/stop button 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSEngine start/stop button 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSEngine start/stop button 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSEngine start/stop button 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSEngine start/stop button 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSEngine start/stop button 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSEngine start/stop button 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSEngine start/stop button 84
84-9
Engine start/stop button
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
The button is used to start and stop the engine, It has two indicator lights:– Upper light A: ready to start signal,– Lower light B: engine running signal.
CONNECTION
The starter button can be checked using an ohmmeter.
18466
Track Description
1234
Start/Stop button motor signalPower supplyInvitation to start indicator light controlEngine running indicator light control
Track Value Description
1 and 22 and 3
2 and 4
≈ 2 ohms≈ 20 ohms
≈ 20 ohms
Start/Stop pulseInvitation to start indicator lightEngine running indicator light
CONTROLS - SIGNALSVoice synthesiser/Cruise control Switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSVoice synthesiser/Cruise control Switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSVoice synthesiser/Cruise control Switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSVoice synthesiser/Cruise control Switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSVoice synthesiser/Cruise control Switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSVoice synthesiser/Cruise control Switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSVoice synthesiser/Cruise control Switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSVoice synthesiser/Cruise control Switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSVoice synthesiser/Cruise control Switches 84
84-10
Voice synthesiser/Cruise control Switches
1 Voice synthesiser (according to equipment)2 Electronic stability program system3 Cruise control/speed limiter (according to
equipment)
If the switches are removed, the support plate also has to be removed.
CONNECTION
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM SYSTEM SWITCH
VOICE SYNTHESISER SWITCH
CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER SWITCH
18461
Track Description
A1A2A3B1B2B3
supplyEarthNot in useOn/Off switchNot in useNot in use
Track Description
123
Repeat message commandEarthMute command
Track Description
A1A2A3B1B2B3
+ Monitor+ After ignition feed (shut-down circuit)Cruise control on / offSpeed limiter On/OffEarthNot in use
CONTROLS - SIGNALSLighting dimmer 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSLighting dimmer 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSLighting dimmer 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSLighting dimmer 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSLighting dimmer 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSLighting dimmer 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSLighting dimmer 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSLighting dimmer 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSLighting dimmer 84Lighting dimmer
LIGHTING DIMMER
To remove the dimmer, remove the dimmer support plate and disconnect the connectors (according to equipment).
Unclip the dimmer (A) from the support plate.
CONNECTION
N.B.: There are two different dimmers, depending on the equipment fitted in the car: – a top of the range dimmer for the regulated heating
and ventilation system, – and a bottom of the range dimmer for the manual
heating and ventilation system.
The lighting dimmer can be checked using an ohmmeter.– lighting button (tracks 1 and 3) ≈ 70 ohms– adjusting knob (tracks 2 and 3) = from 0 to
1000 ohms (top of the range)– adjusting knob (tracks 2 and 3) = from 0 to 33 ohms
(bottom of the range)
18462
Track Description
123
+ MonitorLighting dimmerEarth
84-11
CONTROLS - SIGNALSHazard warning lights switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHazard warning lights switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHazard warning lights switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHazard warning lights switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHazard warning lights switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHazard warning lights switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHazard warning lights switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHazard warning lights switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHazard warning lights switches 84
84-12
Hazard warning lights switches
The upper section must be unclipped from the console in order to remove the switch.
Checks with multimeter
Track Description
1234
Not in useEarthFlasher timer (+ before ignition feed)Flasher timer
18464
Track Value Description
2 and 3
2 and 3
Infinite resistance
0 ohms
Hazard warning lights off
Hazard warning lights on
CONTROLS - SIGNALSCentral door locking switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSCentral door locking switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSCentral door locking switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSCentral door locking switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSCentral door locking switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSCentral door locking switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSCentral door locking switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSCentral door locking switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSCentral door locking switch 84
84-13
Central door locking switch
The upper section must be unclipped from the console in order to remove the switch.
Checks with multimeter
18463
Track Description
A1A2A3B1B2B3
+ After ignitionEarthLockingUnlocking+ Before ignitionLED supply
Track Description Value
A1/A2A2/A3A2/B1
Button lightingLockingUnlocking
30 ohms0 ohms0 ohms
CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84
84-14
Electric window switches
ELBOW REST (the fullest version)
A Driver and front passenger electric windows switchB Rear left and right electric windows switchC Rear electric windows and doors locking switch
(according to model)
SWITCH REMOVAL
The electric windows control plate is clipped to the door panel by tabs (D).
There are two simple methods of removing the plate:– 1) with a pair of crimping pliers,
– 2) with an electric wire to pull on the bolts.
Disconnect the connectors.
Pull out the switches by pressing on the tabs (D).
18465
18789
19071
18465
CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84
84-15
DRIVER'S DOOR ELECTRIC WINDOW SWITCHES
Cars may be fitted with one of three types of electric window switches:
! Driver's one touch window/passenger's electric window
Driver's dual control electric window(normal and one touch) and passenger's single control electric window.
! Driver and passenger one touch window without multiplex connection
Driver and passenger dual control electric window (normal and one touch).
! One touch electric window with multiplex connection
This is outwardly identical to the model without a multiplex connection, but it is wired differently.
For further details on the electric window systems, refer to section 87.
NOTE: These switches light up when the ignition is turned on (not night lighting).
DRIVER'S DOOR REAR ELECTRIC WINDOW SWITCHES
Cars may be fitted with two types of dual switches:
! Electric windowRear left and right switches (one position only).
! One touch electric windowTwo position rear left and right switches (normal and one touch functions for the rear windows).
For further details on the electric window systems, refer to section 87.
NOTE: These switches light up when the ignition is turned on (not night lighting).
18465 18465
CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84
84-16
! Driver's one touch window/passenger's electric window black connector (left-hand drive)
CONNECTION
OPERATION (check the resistance using a multimeter)
! Driver's one touch window/passenger's electric window black connector (right-hand drive)
OPERATION (check the resistance using a multimeter)
Track Description
A1A2A3A4A5A6B1B2B3B4B5B6
Passenger side electric window switch+ Before ignition+ after ignitionDriver's side electric window controlNot in useNot in useNot in useNot in usePassenger side electric window switchEarthDriver's side electric window controlNot in use
ACTIONTRACK
A4/B4 B5/B4 A1 B3
None α α A2 A2
Driver basic opening
0 α - -
Driver basic closing
α 0 - -
Driver one touch opening
0 (1st)
0 (2nd)
- -
Driver one touch closing
0 (2nd)
0 (1st) - -
Passenger opening
- - B4 A2
Passenger closing
- - A2 B4
Track Description
A1A2A3A4A5A6B1B2B3B4B5B6
Passenger side electric window switch+ Before ignition+ after ignitionDriver's side electric window controlNot in useNot in useNot in useNot in usePassenger side electric window switchEarthDriver's side electric window controlNot in use
ACTIONTRACK
A1 B3 A2/B4 B5/B4
None A2 A2 α α
Driver basic opening
- - 0 α
Driver basic closing
- - α 0
Driver one touch opening
- -0
(1st)0
(2nd)
Driver one touch closing
- -0
(2nd)0
(1st)
Passenger opening
A2 B4 - -
Passenger closing
B4 A2 - -
CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84
84-17
! Driver and passenger one touch window without multiplex connection grey connector (left-hand drive)
OPERATION (check the resistance using a multimeter)
! Driver and passenger one touch window without multiplex connection grey connector (right-hand drive)
OPERATION (check the resistance using a multimeter)
Track Description
A1A2A3A4A5A6B1B2B3B4B5B6
Passenger side electric window switchEarth+ after ignitionDriver's side electric window controlNot in useNot in useNot in usePassenger side electric window switchEarthEarthDriver's side electric window controlNot in use
ACTIONSTracks
B2/B3 A1/A2 A4/B4 B5/B4
None α α α α
Driver basic opening
- - 0 α
Driver basic closing
- - α 0
Driver one touch opening
- -0
(1st)0
(2nd)
Driver one touch closing
- -0
(2nd)0
(1st)
Passenger basic opening
α 0 - -
Passenger basic closing 0 α - -
Driver one touch opening
0 (2nd)
0 (1st) - -
Driver one touch closing
0 (1st)
0 (2nd)
- -
Track Description
A1A2A3A4A5A6B1B2B3B4B5B6
Driver's side electric window controlNot in use+ after ignitionPassenger side electric window switchEarth+ Before ignitionNot in useNot in useDriver's side electric window controlEarthPassenger side electric window switch+ Before ignition
ACTIONSTracks
A1/B4 B3/B4 B5/A5 A4/B6
None α α α α
Driver basic opening
0 α - -
Driver basic closing
α 0 - -
Driver one touch opening
0 (1st)
0 (2nd)
- -
Driver one touch closing
0 (2nd)
0 (1st)
- -
Passenger basic opening
- - α 0
Passenger basic closing - - 0 α
Driver one touch opening - -
0 (2nd)
0 (1st)
Driver one touch closing
- -0
(1st)0
(2nd)
CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84
84-18
! One touch window with multiplex connection black connector (all types)
OPERATION (check the resistance using a multimeter)
! Rear basic electric window: white connector
OPERATION (check the resistance using a multimeter)
Track Description
A1A2A3A4A5A6B1B2B3B4B5B6
Not in useRight electric window control+ after ignitionLeft electric window controlNot in useNot in useNot in useNot in useRight electric window controlEarthLeft electric window controlNot in use
ACTIONSTracks
A2/B4 B3/B4 A4/B4 B5/B4
None α α α α
Left basic opening
- - 0 α
Left basic closing
- - α 0
Left one touch opening
- - 0 0
Left one touch closing
- - 0 0
Right basic opening
0 α - -
Right basic closing
α 0 - -
Right one touch opening
0 (1st)
0 (2nd)
- -
Right one touch closing
0 (2nd)
0 (1st) - -
Track Description
A1A2A3A4A5A6B1B2B3B4B5B6
Not in useRight electric window control+ after ignitionLeft electric window control+ after ignition+ Before ignitionNot in useNot in useRight electric window controlEarthLeft electric window controlNot in use
ACTIONSTracks
A4 B5 A2 B3
None A5 A5 B5 A5
Right opening - - B4 A5
Right closing - - A5 B4
Left opening B4 A5 - -
Left closing A5 B4 - -
CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84
84-19
! Rear one touch electric window: black connector
OPERATION (check the resistance using a multimeter)
Track Description
A1A2A3A4A5A6B1B2B3B4B5B6
Right electric window control+ Before ignition+ after ignition+ Before ignitionLeft electric window controlNot in useNot in useRight electric window control+ Before ignitionEarth+ Before ignitionLeft electric window control
ACTIONSTracks
A5/B4 B6/B4 A1/B4 B2/B4
None α α α α
Right basic opening
- - 0 α
Right basic closing
- - α 0
Right one touch opening
- -0
(1st)0
(2nd)
Right one touch closing
- -0
(2nd)0
(1st)
Left basic opening
0 α - -
Left basic closing
α 0 - -
Left one touch opening
0 (1st)
0 (2nd)
- -
Left one touch closing
0 (2nd)
0 (1st)
- -
CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84
84-20
PASSENGER'S DOOR ELECTRIC WINDOW SWITCH
Cars may be fitted with one of three types of electric window switches:
! Basic electric window! One touch electric window without multiplex
connection! One touch electric window with multiplex
connection
For further details on the electric window systems, refer to section 87.
! Basic electric window: brown connector
! Electric window with multiplex connection: grey connector
NOTE: the resistance of the button lighting is approximately 30 Ohms
18469
Track Description
A1A2A3B1B2B3
Driver's door connection (B3)EarthElectric window raise controlElectric window lower controlDriver's door connection (A1)+ after ignition
ACTIONSTRACKS
B1 A3
None B2 A1
Basic opening B2 A2
Basic closing A2 A1
Track Description
A1A2A3B1B2B3
Electric window controlElectric window controlSwitched earth Switched earthEarth+ after ignition feed lighting button
ACTIONSTRACKS
A1 A2
None α α
Basic opening 0 α
Basic closing α 0
One touch opening0
(1st)0
(2nd)
One touch closing0
(2nd)0
(1st)
ACTIONSTRACKS
A3/A2 B1/B2
None α α
Basic opening 0 α
Basic closing α 0
One touch opening0
(1st)0
(2nd)
One touch closing0
(2nd)0
(1st)
CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric window switches 84
84-21
REAR DOOR ELECTRIC WINDOW SWITCHES
BASIC ELECTRIC WINDOW SWITCH
REAR ANTI-PINCH ELECTRIC WINDOW SWITCH: white connector
18469
Track Description
A1A2A3B1B2B3
+ after ignitionEarth+ after ignitionElectric window motor+ after ignition+ after ignition
ACTIONSTRACKS
A2/A3 B1/B2 B1/A2 A1/A3
None α 0 α 0
Basic opening 0 0 α α
Basic closing α α 0 0
Track Description
A1A2A3B1B2B3
Electric window controlSwitched earth (electric window lock)+ Before ignition+ Before ignitionElectric window control+ after ignition feed lighting button
ACTIONSTRACKS
A2/B1 A2/A3
None α α
Basic opening α 0
Basic closing 0 α
One touch opening0
(2nd)0
(1st)
One touch closing0
(1st)0
(2nd)
CONTROLS - SIGNALSChild lock switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSChild lock switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSChild lock switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSChild lock switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSChild lock switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSChild lock switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSChild lock switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSChild lock switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSChild lock switch 84Child lock switch
CHILD LOCK SWITCH
A red light on the switch, operated by the UCH, comes on during locking. This switch is used to prevent the opening of the rear doors and windows (depending on the car model).
! Electric windowPressing the child lock switch sends a message to the UCH, which operates the child lock relay.
! One touch electric windowWhether the child lock switch is on or off, the control earth on the one touch electric window switches can send a signal to the UCH to inform it of the present condition.
NOTE: These switches light up when the ignition is turned on (not night lighting).
18465
Track Description
A1A2A3B1B2B3
+ After ignitionNot in useChild lock switch indicator lightRear electric window lockEarthNot in use
84-22
CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric sunroof switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric sunroof switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric sunroof switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric sunroof switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric sunroof switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric sunroof switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric sunroof switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric sunroof switch 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric sunroof switch 84
84-23
Electric sunroof switch
ELECTRIC SUNROOF SWITCH
OPERATION (check the resistance using a multimeter)
N.B.: 0 = circuit loop (closed)1 = open circuit
18937
SWITCH POSITION
Tracks 1 and 6
Tracks 1 and 5
Tracks 1 and 3
Tracks 1 and 2
Slide position 6 0 0 0 1
Slide position 5 0 0 1 1
Slide position 4 0 0 1 0
Slide position 3 0 1 1 0
Slide position 2 0 1 1 1
Slide position 1 0 1 0 1
Closed 0 1 0 0
Tilt position 1 1 1 0 0
Tilt position 2 1 1 0 1
Tilt position 3 1 1 1 0
Pressed 0 0 0 0
CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated windscreen and rear screen switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated windscreen and rear screen switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated windscreen and rear screen switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated windscreen and rear screen switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated windscreen and rear screen switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated windscreen and rear screen switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated windscreen and rear screen switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated windscreen and rear screen switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated windscreen and rear screen switches 84
84-24
Heated windscreen and rear screen switches
ELECTRICALLY HEATED WINDSCREEN AND REAR SCREEN SWITCHES
The heated windscreen and rear screen switches are located on the heating and ventilation control panel.
If the switches need replacing, the entire panel has to be replaced.
CONNECTION (grey connector)
NOTE: For information on the allocation of other connector tracks, see the "heating and ventilation system" section.
18471
Track Description
124569
1012141618
EarthLight supplyElectrically heated windscreen switch.Fault finding line+ After ignitionMultiplex connectionMultiplex connectionHeated rear screen switchEarth by rheostatEarth+ Before ignition
CONTROLS - SIGNALSDoor opening sensor 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSDoor opening sensor 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSDoor opening sensor 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSDoor opening sensor 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSDoor opening sensor 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSDoor opening sensor 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSDoor opening sensor 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSDoor opening sensor 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSDoor opening sensor 84
84-25
Door opening sensor
DOOR OPENING SENSOR
To allow the use of the hands-free option, the door handles must be fitted with the following types of sensor:! The presence sensor (A), accompanied by a door
handle reflector, which detects the user's hand.! The movement sensor, to open the door when the
presence sensors no longer operate (this occurs when the car has not been used over a long period of time).
NOTE: For information on the removal of the handle, refer to the bodywork section.
CONNECTION
IMPORTANT: in order to detect the user's hand, the presence sensor must be accompanied by a translucent cover and a reflector fitted to the handle. Cracks or scratches may impair the working of the hands-free opening device.
18993
Track Description
123
Battery +EarthSensor signal
18697
CONTROLS - SIGNALSDoor locks 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSDoor locks 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSDoor locks 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSDoor locks 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSDoor locks 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSDoor locks 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSDoor locks 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSDoor locks 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSDoor locks 84
84-26
Door locks
Each car has a different door locking system appropriate to the equipment level fitted.! the bottom of the range version (4 track connector) is
fitted with electric locks and a closing sensor, but not with body flange sensors.
! the top of the range version (6 track connector) is fitted with a central locking system that can disable the internal door handles. This system can also control child lock system.
CONNECTION
! Bottom of the range version (left-hand side)
! Bottom of the range version (right-hand side)
! Top of the range version (front left)
! Top of the range version (front right)
! Top of the range version (rear left)
! Top of the range version (rear right)
18696
Track Description
ABCD
+ locking motor- locking motorDoor switchDoor switch
Track Description
ABCD
Door switchDoor switch- locking motor+ locking motor
Track Description
ABCDE
F
+ locking motor- locking motorDoor switchDoor switch- central locking or child locking system motor (rear door)+ central locking or child locking system motor (rear door)
Track Description
A
BCDEF
+ central locking or child locking system motor (rear door)- central locking system motorDoor switchDoor switch- locking motor+ locking motor
Track Description
ABCDEF
+ locking motor- locking and child locking system motorDoor switch/child lock switchDoor switch+ child central locking system motorChild lock switch
Track Description
AB
CDEF
Child lock switch+ central locking or child locking system motor (rear door)Door switchDoor switch/child lock switch- locking and child locking system motor+ locking motor
CONTROLS - SIGNALSTailgate switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSTailgate switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSTailgate switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSTailgate switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSTailgate switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSTailgate switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSTailgate switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSTailgate switches 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSTailgate switches 84
84-27
Tailgate switches
The full on-full off tailgate switch is identical on all cars, including cars fitted with the hands free option.
NOTE: The trim must be removed to remove the tailgate opening switch. See the bodywork section.
The rear screen opening switch is a full on-full off switch.
TAILGATE/OPENING REAR SCREEN LOCKS
NOTE: The trim must be removed to remove the tailgate opening switch. See the bodywork section.
CONNECTION
The motor resistance is approximately 10 ohms.
18316
18315
Track Description
1234
- Motor+ MotorOpening signalEarth
CONTROLS - SIGNALSRear-view mirror control 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRear-view mirror control 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRear-view mirror control 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRear-view mirror control 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRear-view mirror control 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRear-view mirror control 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRear-view mirror control 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRear-view mirror control 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSRear-view mirror control 84
84-28
Rear-view mirror control
ELECTRIC REAR-VIEW MIRROR CONTROLS
There are several types of rear-view mirror control, which are appropriate to the level of equipment fitted:! Basic electric rear-view mirror control! Non-multiplex folding electric rear-view mirror
control! Multiplex folding electric rear-view mirror control
(see section 87)
NOTE: the controls for the multiplex and non-multiplex rear-view mirrors are identical, but they have different wiring.
! Basic electric rear-view mirror control
! Folding electric rear-view mirror multiplex control (option: driver's seat position memory)
! Non-multiplex folding electric rear-view mirror control (no memory)
NOTE: These switches light up when the ignition is turned on (not night lighting).
18467
Track Description
A1
A2A3
A4B1
B2
B3B4
Up/down movement of the driver's rear-view mirror (track 3B on the rear-view mirror)+ Before ignitionLeft/right movement of the driver's rear-view mirrorNot in useLeft/right movement of the passenger's rear-view mirrorUp/down movement of the passenger's rear-view mirrorEarthMotor common
Track Description
1
23456
7
8
9
10
Driver and passenger rear-view mirror signals+ After ignitionEarthrear-view mirror motor commonFolding rear-view mirror common lineUp/down control for the passenger's rear-view mirrorUp/down control for the driver's rear-view mirrorLeft/right control for the passenger's rear-view mirrorLeft/right control for the driver's rear-view mirrorNot in use
Track Description
123
456
7
8
9
10
Rear-view mirror motors common (3B)+ After ignitionRear-view mirror motors common (tracks 2C)Earth+ Before ignitionUp/down movement of the passenger's rear-view mirror (track 2B)Up/down movement of the driver's rear-view mirror (track 2B)Left/right movement of the passenger's rear-view mirror (track 2A)Left/right movement of the driver's rear-view mirror (track 2A)Driver and passenger rear-view mirror signals (track 3C)
CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric rear-view mirrors 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric rear-view mirrors 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric rear-view mirrors 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric rear-view mirrors 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric rear-view mirrors 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric rear-view mirrors 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric rear-view mirrors 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric rear-view mirrors 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectric rear-view mirrors 84
84-29
Electric rear-view mirrors
EXTERIOR REAR-VIEW MIRRORS
The electric rear-view mirrors components are as follows:! two motors for vertical and horizontal adjustment,! an external temperature gauge on the passenger's
side,! a folding motor (according to model),! a heating system (according to model),! an autodimming or electro-chrome system linked to
the interior rear-view mirror to dim the mirrors in bright light (according to model),
! a multiplex connection (according to model).
NOTE: Removing the exterior rear-view mirrors does not require removal of the door trim.
IMPORTANT: on cars fitted with the Driving position memoryoption, the passenger's rear-view mirror is fitted with a multiplex connection. This connection allows information stored in the passenger's electric window motor (see section 87: on Driving position memory) to be gathered.
CONNECTION (fullest version)
The resistance of the heating system is approximately 13 ohms.
The temperature gauge resistance should be 2500 ohms for approximately 20˚C.
The resistance of the electro-chrome system is approximately 4000 ohms.
NOTE: the exterior rear-view mirror and the rear screen heating is switched on by the same switch.
18552
Track Description
1B1C1D1E1F1G2A2B2C2D2E2F2G2H3B3C3D
3E
3F3G
Rear-view mirror demistingRear-view mirror demistingTemperature sensor (passenger side)Temperature sensor (passenger side)Not in useNot in useHorizontal movement motorVertical movement motorMotor commonHorizontal position potentiometerVertical position potentiometerPower supplyEarthNot in useTilt motorTilt motorBrightness information (interior rear-view mirror)Brightness information (interior rear-view mirror)Not in useNot in use
CONTROLS - SIGNALSInterior rear-view mirror 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSInterior rear-view mirror 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSInterior rear-view mirror 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSInterior rear-view mirror 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSInterior rear-view mirror 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSInterior rear-view mirror 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSInterior rear-view mirror 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSInterior rear-view mirror 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSInterior rear-view mirror 84
84-30
Interior rear-view mirror
INTERIOR REAR-VIEW MIRROR
The interior rear-view mirror can be fitted with the autodimming (electro-chrome) system.
This system works by comparing levels of brightness gauged by two sensors:– Sensor A on the windscreen side,– Sensor B on the mirror side,
NOTE: the exterior rear-view mirrors can also be fitted with this system. In this case, the mirror dimming is controlled by the interior rear-view mirror. (There are no light sensors on the exterior rear-view mirrors).
CONNECTION
18935
18826
Track Description
123
456
Power supplyEarthBrightness information (track 3E exterior rear-view mirror)Brightness information (track 3D)Not in useNot in use
CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated rear screen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated rear screen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated rear screen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated rear screen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated rear screen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated rear screen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated rear screen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated rear screen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated rear screen 84
84-31
Heated rear screen
DESCRIPTION
This system electrically heats the rear screen by means of a heating grid applied to the interior surface of the window.
A switch on the instrument panel operates the heating system.
The heating system is authorised with the engine on and is timed.
NOTE: Switching on the rear screen heater also switches on the exterior rear-view mirror heaters (according to model).
REPAIR
The heating grid may be accidentally cut, impairing the part of the grid affected.
The exact location of the cut can be determined using a voltmeter.
This fault can be repaired by applying the heated rear screen varnish sold under replacement part number 77 01 421 135.
CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated rear screen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated rear screen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated rear screen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated rear screen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated rear screen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated rear screen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated rear screen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated rear screen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSHeated rear screen 84
84-32
! Clean the section to be treated in order to remove all dust and grease, preferably using an alcohol-based solvent or a glass cleaner. Wipe with a dry cloth.
! Before varnishing, apply adhesive tape to either side of the section to be repaired, leaving the conducting line free, to ensure that the new line is straight.
! Shake the varnish bottle before use.
! Using a small brush, apply a sufficiently thick coat to the area needing repair. If more than one coat is needed, wait for each coat to dry before applying the next (do not exceed three coats).
! Leave the varnish to dry for about an hour before removing the tape.
! Peel off the tape, keeping it straight and pointing in the same direction as the arrow.
! If the varnish runs, let it dry thoroughly and then use a knife or razor blade to scrape off any excess.
NOTE: the varnish takes approximately three hours to dry at room temperature.
CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectrically heated windscreen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectrically heated windscreen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectrically heated windscreen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectrically heated windscreen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectrically heated windscreen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectrically heated windscreen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectrically heated windscreen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectrically heated windscreen 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSElectrically heated windscreen 84
84-33
Electrically heated windscreen
DESCRIPTION
This system electrically heats the windscreen by means of a heated grid applied to the interior surface of the window.
The heating system is operated via the instrument panel.
The heating system is authorised with the engine on and is timed.
CONTROLS - SIGNALSExternal temperature gauge 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSExternal temperature gauge 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSExternal temperature gauge 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSExternal temperature gauge 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSExternal temperature gauge 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSExternal temperature gauge 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSExternal temperature gauge 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSExternal temperature gauge 84CONTROLS - SIGNALSExternal temperature gauge 84
84-34
External temperature gauge
The external temperature gauge is located in the driver's side exterior rear-view mirror.
REMOVAL
Remove the mirror.
Remove the half-shell mounting bolt (1).
Unclip the gauge (2) and cut the wires.
REFITTING
Rejoin the two temperature gauge wires using heat-shrink sleeves.
NOTE: The external temperature gauge resistance should be 2500 ohms at approximately 20˚C.
19256
WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85185WIPERSWindscreen wiper
AUTOMATIC WINDSCREEN WIPER
Operating notes
In normal operation, the windscreen wiper works intermittently, at either high or low speed. This can be modified according to the car speed (for cars not fitted with rain sensors) and by the ring on the windscreen wiper control stalk.
A wiper blade speed selected when the car is moving will automatically be reduced when the car stops as follows:! continuous fast wiping speed is switched to continuous slow wiping speed,! continuous slow wiping speed is switched to intermittent wiping.
When the car starts moving again, the speed reverts to the one originally selected.
NOTE: if the car is fitted with a rain sensor, the wiper blade speed does not change according to the car speed.
NOTE:! any operation of the windscreen wiper control stalk takes priority and cancels out the UCH strategy.! the automatic control will not function if the high or low speeds were selected when the car was stationary.
SPECIAL NOTES:! if the wiper blades are subject to too great a force, the UCH automatically switches to a lower speed.! in the event of the wiper blades becoming blocked (e.g. if the windscreen freezes over), the UCH automatically cuts
the motor supply.
N.B.: for special notes on the windscreen wiper control stalk, see section 84.
85-1
WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85
85-2
RAIN SENSOR
The UCH does not control intermittent wipe in cars fitted with a rain sensor. In this case, the interval and the wiper blade speed are not varied according to the car's speed.
Operating diagram
Components
123456789
10
High speed supplyLow speed supplyAutomatic wipers supplyWipers on/off relayHigh speed/low speed relayPark positionRain sensorUCHWiper control stalkWindscreen wiper motor.
WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85
85-3
RAIN SENSOR
Connection
IMPORTANT: Clean the sensor and the windscreen, making sure that all surfaces are free from grease, before installing the rain sensor. Ensure that there are no air bubbles trapped between the sensor and the windscreen.
Track Description
1
2
34
56
UCH connection (On/Off signal) UCH connection (Low speed relay)+Accessories UCH connection (High speed relay)EarthUCH connection (Park position)
WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85
85-4
WARNING: the wiping system is different on left-hand and right-hand drive cars.
LEFT HAND DRIVE
REMOVAL
Check that the wiper motor is in the park position.Disconnect the battery.
Remove:! the left and right wiper arms (1),! the plenum chamber seal (2),! the left-hand side plenum chamber cover (3),
! the mounting bolts on the wiper assembly,! the motor connector.
Disengage the wiper mechanism/motor assembly.Remove the motor mounting bolts.
REFITTING
Refit the motor, reconnect it and the battery and turn on the ignition to place it in the park position. (Tightening torque: 0.8 daNm)
Clean the wiper arm shaft spline(5).
Refit the wiper arms, making sure they are in the correct original position (4).
Fit the new bolts and tighten them to 2 daNm.
SPECIAL TOOLING REQUIRED
Elé. 1552 Windscreen wiper arm removing tool
18536
18536-1
WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85
85-5
RIGHT HAND DRIVE
REMOVAL
Check that the wiper motor is in the park position.Disconnect the battery.
Remove:! the plenum chamber seal (1),! the left-hand and right-hand side plenum chamber
covers,! the motor mechanism tie-bar bolt (2),! the wiper motor mounting bolts,! the motor connector.
Disengage the wiper motor.
The wiper mechanism is not fixed to the motor. It can be left on the car.
To remove the wiper mechanism, remove:! the left and right wiper arms,! the mechanism mounting bolts,
REFITTING
Refit the motor, reconnect it and the battery and turn on the ignition to place it in the park position. (Tightening torque: 0.8 daNm).
Clean the wiper arm shaft spline (5).
Refit the wiper arms, making sure they are in the correct original position (4).
Fit the new bolts and tighten them to 2 daNm.
SPECIAL TOOLING REQUIRED
Elé. 1552 Windscreen wiper arm removing tool
18533
WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85WIPERSWindscreen wiper 85
85-6
CONNECTOR ALLOCATIONS
The motor connection is the same on left-hand and right-hand drive cars.
18535
Track Description
12345
EarthPark positionNot in useLow speed supplyHigh speed supply
WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85Rear screen wiper
OPERATION
In normal operation, the rear screen wiper works intermittently, with a fixed time delay.
When the windscreen wipers are switched on, the rear wipers are automatically switched on if reverse gear is selected.
CONNECTOR ALLOCATIONS
18553
Track Description
123
Motor supply,Park positionEarth
85-7
WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85
85-8
SALOON AND ESTATE MODELS WITH FIXED REAR SCREENS
REMOVING THE MOTOR
Check that the wiper motor is in the park position.Open the boot and disconnect the battery.
Remove:! the boot trim (see the section on bodywork),! the wiper arm,! the wiper motor mounting bolts. Disconnect the
motor.
REFITTING
Reconnect the motor and the battery to place it in the park position after refitting.
Clean the wiper arm shaft splines.
Fit the new bolts and tighten them to 1.2 daNm.
SPECIAL TOOLING REQUIRED
Elé. 1552 Windscreen wiper arm removing tool
18553
WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85WIPERSRear screen wiper 85
85-9
ESTATE MODEL WITH OPENING REAR SCREEN
REMOVING THE MOTOR
Check that the wiper motor is in the park position.Disconnect the battery.
Remove:! the boot trim (see the section on bodywork),! the wiper arm,! the wiper motor mounting bolts. Disconnect the
motor.
Disengage the wiper motor.
The wiper mechanism is fixed to the opening rear screen. It can be left on the car.
REFITTING
Reconnect the motor and the battery to place it in the park position after refitting.
REMOVING THE MECHANISM
The wiper mechanism is fixed to the opening rear screen. There are no special instructions for its removal.
REFITTING
Clean the wiper arm shaft splines.
Fit a new bolt and tighten it to 1.2 daNm.
NOTE: if the opening rear screen needs replacing, adjust the mechanism as follows:– if the mechanism is positioned too low, the wiping
sweep will be narrowed.– if the mechanism is positioned too high, the wiping
sweep will be widened.
WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85Opening rear screen wiper mechanism
METHOD FOR FITTING THE OPENING REAR SCREEN WIPER MECHANISM
PRINCIPLE FOR FITTING
After having fitted:– the opening rear screen and adjusted the gaps, see
(MR 340 Section 54 F),– the rear screen lock (without clamping it)– the motor plate (C),
– position the three jig indexing pins (D) on the motor plate at (E) (photo opposite).
85301-2
! (A) moving wiper mechanism! (B) fitting jig (tool Ele. 1580)! (C) motor plate
85-10
WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85
– clip the jig in place on the motor plate (C).
– Undo the mountings (F) of the striker,– clip the moving wiper mechanism in place on the jig
and engage the striker in the lock,
– fit the rubber ring on the rear screen and reclose it carefully,
– fit the indexed shim then the mounting nut and pre-tighten the nut,
– tighten the nut (G) to torque: (4 Nm),– tighten the striker and lock mounting bolts.
85-11
WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85WIPERSOpening rear screen wiper mechanism 85
– tighten the nut (H) to torque: (8 Nm).
IMPORTANT: Check for correct operation of the windscreen wiper motor before refitting the wiper blade.
– position the windscreen wiper blade 5 mm below the heated rear screen wiring,
– tighten the windscreen wiper arm to torque: (12 Nm).
85-12
WIPERSWindscreen washer 85WIPERSWindscreen washer 85WIPERSWindscreen washer 85WIPERSWindscreen washer 85WIPERSWindscreen washer 85WIPERSWindscreen washer 85WIPERSWindscreen washer 85WIPERSWindscreen washer 85WIPERSWindscreen washer 85
85-13
Windscreen washer
OPERATION
This vehicle is fitted with a two-way electric pump which feeds fluid from the same reservoir to both the windscreen and rear screen washers according to the electrical supply to the two track connector.
The windscreen and rear screen washers are controlled from the wiper control stalk.
There are two scenarios:
! 1) when the pipes are fed via the outlet (A), the windscreen washer operates.
! 2) when the pipes are fed via the outlet (B), the rear screen washer operates.
REMOVING - REFITTING THE PUMP
The front bumper must be removed in order to access the washer pump. (See the section on bodywork)
Mark the two pipes before disconnecting them when removing the washer pump.
NOTE: some models, such as cold climate cars, are fitted with electric heating air vents.
Track Description
12
FeedEarth
Track Description
12
EarthPower supply
WIPERSHeadlight washers 85WIPERSHeadlight washers 85WIPERSHeadlight washers 85WIPERSHeadlight washers 85WIPERSHeadlight washers 85WIPERSHeadlight washers 85WIPERSHeadlight washers 85WIPERSHeadlight washers 85WIPERSHeadlight washers 85
85-14
Headlight washers
Special notes
The headlight washer pump is fed via the UCH when the screen washer and the daytime running lights or dipped beam lights are switched on (1).
The electric pump for the headlight washers is located next to the screen washer pump (2).
The front bumper must be removed in order to remove the pumps.
CONNECTOR ALLOCATIONS
N.B.: Only cars fitted with headlight washers have a liquid level sensor (3).
REMOVING - REFITTING THE JETS
The jets are divided into two sections:! a visible section,! a section behind the front bumper.
Use a screwdriver to keep the feed pipe rigid when removing the visible section.
The front bumper must be removed in order to remove the inner section.
18938
Track Description
AB
FeedEarth
RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86186RADIORadio
1 on off2 < and >keys change the configuration mode3 + and - keys change the settings4 "source" key
There are two radio models available:! radio + tape player with optional CD changer! radio + single CD player with optional CD changer
The radio features allow you to:! listen to the radio (four geographical zones can be
programmed for FM radio)! display the name of the station using RDS! automatic reception of the best transmitter (AF) ! receive road traffic and travel information (TA)! receive news flashes and emergency bulletins (PTY
NEWS)
Radio operation
REMINDER: four geographical zones can be programmed for FM radio.
The radio has three selection modes visible on the screen and accessible form the panel:– manual mode (MANU)– preselected mode (PRESET)– alphabetical order mode (LIST)
Tape operation
The tape plays automatically once the tape source has been selected on the satellite or on the panel.
NOTE: Only the Dolby fast forward and rewind with search controls can be accessed by specific keys.
NOTE: the voice synthesiser or the car phone Mute function will stop the tape playing.
CD operation (single CD)
The CD player can play classical CDs and any CD-ROM audio tracks.
CDs can be played in order or tracks can be chosen at random.
NOTE: the random function only operates on the current CD in the case of CD changers.
Heat protection
If the radio overheats and its workings are slightly impaired, the volume will be automatically lowered without changing the volume displayed.
18627
86-1
RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86
86-2
Code protection
The radio is protected by a four digit code. This code must be programmed via the control satellite every time the battery is disconnected.
If the code is entered incorrectly, the radio will cease to function for: one minute for the first mistake, two minutes for the second mistake, four minutes for the third mistake etc.
Some settings must be made after the code has been entered for the first time (see section on Configuration). These settings are preserved when the battery is disconnected.
N.B.: the code can be scrambled by pressing keys 2 and 5 at the same time with the voltage power on. Wait two minutes.
Configuration
NOTE: to select the zone in which the radio is to be used, press keys 2 and 5 with the power on. Wait approximately two minutes. Enter the four digit code and then:! Select the relevant zone:
! America! Japan! Asia! Arabia! Others
! select the volume control for the appropriate car model! 0: control inactive! 1: not in use! 2: Clio! 3: Megane! 4: Laguna! 5: Safrane
! configuration of number of speakers: REAR ON/OFF
To move to configuration mode (Expert mode), press and hold the source key for about four seconds until you hear a beep. This controls the following functions:! activation of AF mode (automatic retuning)! Volume control in relation to car speed (5 for
maximum change, 0 for no change)! activation of Loudness mode! activation of Assisted radio mode! configuration of number of speakers (2 or 4)! selection of manual or dynamic list
N.B.: pressing the source key when entering the configurations cancels the changes.
18627
RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86
86-3
Volume control
The volume can be configured in relation to the car speed. To operate this function:
! select the desired volume control by using the expert mode (press and hold the source key until you hear a beep): 5 for maximum change, 0 for no change.
NOTE: Ensure this function is fully operational by checking that the radio is correctly wired.
Self-test mode
The self-test mode checks some of the main functions.
! testing the speakersThe speakers are fed one at a time if you press keys 2 and 4 simultaneously. This is confirmed by the display.
! testing the reception level (after display of the frequency)
The display shows the radio reception information if you press keys 1 and 6 simultaneously:
– 9 or letter: good reception– si 3: poor signal– si 2: no stereo
! testing the keysTo enter this mode, press key 3 and the on/off key at the same time. Every time a key is pressed, it will appear on the display. The mode exits automatically once all the keys have been pressed.
RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86
86-4
Connector allocations
Black connector (A)
Yellow connector (B)
Brown connector (C)
NOTE: the speakers are connected in parallel on each outlet.
TRACK Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Vehicle speed signal
Not in use
Voice synthesiser signal (mute)
Battery supply
Aerial amplifier supply
Light supply
Accessories supply
Earth
TRACK Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
Display connection (track 13)
Display connection (track 14)
Display connection (track 15)
Not in use
Earth shielding (track 12)
Display connection (track 11)
TRACK Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+ Rear right speaker
- Rear right speaker
+ Rear right speaker
- Rear right speaker
+ Front left speaker
- Front left speaker
+ Front left speaker
- Front left speaker
18458
RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86RADIORadio 86
86-5
CONNECTION
Radio control A on the steering wheel is linked to the display set into the dashboard.
N.B.: if the car is fitted with a CARMINAT navigation system, the radio control on the steering wheel is linked to the Central Communication Unit (see section 83).
TRACK Description
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
Display connection (track 14)
Display connection (track 13)
Display connection (track 10)
Display connection (track 9)
Display connection (track 11)
Display connection (track 12)
18537
RADIOAerial 86RADIOAerial 86RADIOAerial 86RADIOAerial 86RADIOAerial 86RADIOAerial 86RADIOAerial 86RADIOAerial 86RADIOAerial 86
86-6
Aerial
AERIAL GRID
The aerial grid is located:! at the top of the rear screen on saloon models,! on the rear right quarter panel window on estate
models.
This system needs an amplifier fed via the radio, which is located:! under the tailgate lining on saloon models,
! under the rear right lining on estate models.
18551
[GRAPHIC N°]
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87
87-1
187ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH
DESCRIPTION
The UCH is located in the dashboard on the driver's side.
This computer contains most of the electronic units, including the engine immobiliser decoder.
There are two UCH models, depending on the level of equipment installed in the car:! 1) the bottom of the range model,! 2) the top of the range model.
NOTES:! Only the top of the range UCH is available as a
replacement part. This can be fitted in place of the bottom of the range model.
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87
87-2
UCH featuresBottom of the
rangeTop of the
rangeSee section
Indicator control X X -
Daytime running lights control - X 80
Side lights control X X -
Bulb failure (side and brake lights) for the voice synthesiser - X 83
Windscreen and rear screen wipers control X X 85
Headlight washers control - X 85
Doors and windows control X X 87
Doors and windows control (driver's door only) - X 87
Door locking when driving/unlocking on impact X X 87
Doors and windows control (central locking) - X 87
Doors and windows control (electric child locks) - X 87
Door opening indicator light/Electric central door locking indicator light
X X -
Electric tailgate locking control X X -
Timed interior lighting control X X 81
Door locking indicator connection - X 87
Radio frequency remote control X X 87
Hands-free remote control - X 87
Transponder control (engine immobiliser) X X 82
Accessories relay control/+ After ignition starter X X -
Passenger compartment buzzer X X 83
Excess speed feature (Arabia) X X 83
Engine overspeed X X -
External temperature X X -
Multifunction connections to seats and electric rear-view mirrors - X 87
Alarm connection (second mount) X X 82
Variable power assisted steering - X 87
Multiplex network interface X X 88
Interface with fault finding tool X X 88
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87
87-3
REMOVAL
NOTE: locking the air bag computer deactivates the firing lines and unlocks the electric steering column lock.
NOTE:! Modification of or operations on the casing itself are
not permitted; the UCH must be replaced instead.! The configuration sequence must be noted down
before the UCH is removed. The different configurations can be implemented using the fault finding tool.
! The UCH is clipped to the relay and fuse box. If either component is removed, the other must also be removed.
Disconnect the battery.
Remove:– the driver's side dashboard facing,– the two side mounting bolts on the dashboard,– the cover under the dashboard,– The UCH mounting bolt (1),– The accessories cover/voice synthesiser
speaker (2).
Cut the plastic clip (3) of the wiring harness support.
Disconnect the UCH and the passenger compartment fuse and relay box connectors.
Take out the whole of the UCH and the fuse and relay box.
Separate the UCH and the relay and fuse box by pressing on the bolts (4).
18545
18321
18322
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87
REFITTING
Reconnect the wires and fit a large clip to keep the harness firmly in place (3).
Next, program the codes for the car and for the RENAULT Card, and configure the UCH according to the options.
18321
87-4
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87UCH
SE2046
87-5
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87
87-6
Allocation (depending on equipment level).
P100 (40 track connector)
BROWN
TRACK Description
123456789
1011121314151617181920
Signal + RENAULT Card fully inserted into the reader,Timed flasher sensor controlMotor on indicator light controlRear electric window locking controlWindscreen wipers high speed controlRENAULT Card readerSignal + manual gearbox in neutralControl + reversing lightsControl + timed electric central door lockingWindscreen wipers timed low speed controlStart-up indicator light controlNot in useFault finding line K signalExternal temperature outlet display signalWindscreen wipers low speed controlBoot light controlControl + timed electric central door locking and lightingTyre pressure radio frequency signalUCHEngine start/stop button + signal
GREEN
TRACK Description
2122232425262728293031323334353637383940
Central door locking voltageAnti-pinch sunroof and electric window signalNot in use+ control rear screen wiper timer+ control rear screen washer pump+ signal clutchPassenger compartment fan assembly relay controlDriver's infrared door handle sensor signalRear right infrared door handle sensor signalAir conditioning via multiplex network signal- control interior lightsRain sensor start/stop front windscreen wiper + signalPassenger's infrared door handle sensor signalWindscreen wiper park position control+ control windscreen washer pumpRight indicator timer controlLeft indicator timer control- signal rear screen wiper park position switch+ signal windscreen wiper high speed rain sensorAir conditioning via multiplex network
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87
87-7
Allocation (depending on equipment level).
P101 (40 track connector)
BROWN
TRACK Description
123456789
1011121314151617181920
Multiplex connection (L)Variable power-assisted steering motor controlVariable power-assisted steering motor control- signal rear right central door locking+ infrared door handle sensorNot in use- signal rear right first position switchAuthorised supply to opening tailgate motorElectric lock steering column controlNot in useMultiplex connection (H)+signal card presentVariable power-assisted steering motor control- control software lock- signal rear left first position switch- signal driver's first position switchRight hand side indicator controlVariable power-assisted steering motor controlLeft hand side indicator control- signal passenger's first position switch
GREEN
TRACK Description
212223242526272829303132
3334353637383940
- signal rear left central door locking+ control hornRear left infrared door handle sensor signalChild lock controlNot in useNot in useNot in useNot in useSide lights relay control for daytime running lightsDipped beam relay control for daytime running lightsNot in useMultiplex seat position and multiplex central electrical unit passenger door controlNot in useNot in useNot in useStorage controlNot in useNot in useNot in use- control headlight washers coil
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH 87
87-8
Allocation (depending on equipment level).
U1 (24 track connector)
TRACK Description
123456789
101112131415161718192021222324
Electric central door locking outputElectric central door locking outputLeft front side light shunt inputReserveRight front side light shunt inputNumber plate lighting shunt inputRight side light fuse failure inputLeft side light fuse failure inputReserveDipped headlights inputRight rear side light shunt inputReserveReserveElectronic relay and fuse box supply inputReserveStop lights failure inputLeft rear side light shunt inputReserveLeft stop light shunt inputElectric door locking inputRight stop light shunt inputStop switch inputElectric central door locking outputElectric central door locking output
U2 (24 track connector)
TRACK Description
123456789
101112131415161718192021222324
Rear screen wiper relay output+ after ignition relayed input (data processing key)+ after ignition pause relayed input (data processing key)+ after ignition relayed output (data processing key)Electric central door locking supply inputReserveReserveElectric central door locking relay output (opening)Relay plate relay output 2Electric central door locking relay output (closing)Relay plate relay output 1Indicator inputIndicator inputReserveLeft hand side indicator control outputIndicator fault finding inputRight hand side indicator control outputWindscreen wiper (high and low speed) relay outputIndicator supply inputWindscreen wiper start/stop relay inputStarter prohibition relay outputSide lights inputTimed supply relay outputUCH supply input
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87
87-9
Programming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card
REPLACEMENT AND CONFIGURATION OF THE UCH
A new UCH is not programmed with a code. You must therefore program a code into a new UCH fitted to a vehicle to make the UCH operational.
You must have at least one of the old RENAULT Cards for the vehicle, plus the repair code, and the injection computer must be correctly coded before you can perform this procedure.
IMPORTANT: RENAULT Cards submitted during this procedure will only work if:! they have already been coded on this vehicle,! or they are new (not coded).
UCH PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
! Enter into dialogue with the Immobiliser system.! Confirm the SCO27: UCH programming line in the
Specific command item of the Command menu.! The tool displays Please enter the After Sales code
.With no card in the reader, enter the secret After Sales code (12 hexadecimal characters) and confirm it.
! The tool displays Insert a card which has already been programmed for the vehicle. The programming procedure will now be performed.
! The tool displays UCH programmed; the UCH is coded. You must now enter RENAULT Card programming mode to assign the other cards (maximum of four). Several seconds may elapse before this message appears.
WARNING: the maximum time between each operation is 5 minutes, otherwise the procedure will be cancelled and the tool will display the message Procedure interrupted: warning, the cards assigned to the vehicle are the ones assigned before the procedure was performed. The cards submitted before interruption of the procedure are no longer blank and can only be assigned to this vehicle. This message also appears where dialogue with the UCH is lost or the battery power supply fails.
SPECIAL CASES
If the screen displays:! Remove the card from the reader, a card is
already present in the reader,! Verify the After Sales code and ensure that the
card belongs to the vehicle: the code has not been read correctly or the UCH has already been coded on another vehicle. Verify the code then retry input.
! Do you want to check the cards before assigning them to the vehicle? : the UCH is already coded on this vehicle, the UCH suggests reallocation of the RENAULT Card.
! Card not usable on this vehicle: the card code does not correspond to the current vehicle.
! The card inserted is blank. Please insert another card which has already been programmed on the vehicle: insert a card which has already been coded.
! UCH Programming failure: repeat the whole procedure.
WARNING: when a UCH has been programmed with the RENAULT Card code, it is impossible to erase it or to store another code in its place.
WARNING: if a code is programmed into the UCH, the UCH is assigned to the vehicle and it is impossible to erase the code or program in another one.
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87
RENAULT CARD ALLOCATION PROCEDURE
NOTE: it is possible to find out whether a Renault Card is blank or not by means of the ET 115: blank card status.
IMPORTANT: in the event that not all the RENAULT Cards are available, it will be necessary to carry out a subsequent reallocation procedure using all the cards.
! Confirm the SC001: Card programming line in the Specific command item of the Command menu.
! The screen displays Do you want to check the cards before assigning them to the vehicle?
! If you want to check the cards, the tool displays Insert the card fully into the reader. Insert a RENAULT Card until the ignition is switched on:– If the allocation is not possible, the screen displays
Verify the After Sales code and make sure the card belongs to the vehicle. Insert another card.
– If the card is accepted, the screen displays Remove the card from the reader.
! The tool displays Insert the card fully into the reader. Insert a RENAULT Card in the reader and confirm:– If the RENAULT Card is not accepted, the red
warning light remains off.– If the RENAULT Card is accepted, the red warning
light flashes rapidly and the tool displays 1 card programmed then Remove the card from the reader.
! The tool displays Insert the card fully into the reader. Insert a second RENAULT Card until the ignition is switched on:NOTE: If the same RENAULT Card is submitted twice, the system does not acknowledge the second card and the immobiliser warning light remains off.
! Insert the RENAULT Card or the other Cards to be assigned to the vehicle in the Card reader (maximum of 4). The screen displays 2, 3 or 4 cards programmed then Remove the card from the reader.
WARNING: these must be old RENAULT Cards for the vehicle or new non-coded RENAULT Cards.NOTE: the vehicle can only accept a single RENAULT Card having the hands-free function. If a second RENAULT Card is assigned to the vehicle, it will function as an ordinary RENAULT Card.
WARNING: the maximum time between each operation is 2 minutes, otherwise the procedure will be cancelled and the tool will display the message Procedure interrupted: warning, the cards assigned to the vehicle are the ones assigned before performing the procedure. The cards submitted before interruption of the procedure are no longer blank and can only be assigned to this vehicle. This message also appears where dialogue with the UCH is lost or the battery power supply fails.
! Configure the UCH in accordance with the vehicle options and equipment (refer to section 87).
NOTE: there is no operation to perform on the injection computer when the UCH only is replaced, it retains the same immobiliser code.
87-10
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTProgramming/Reallocation of RENAULT Card 87
CONFIGURATION OF THE UCH The configuration options for the UCH are:
CARE: certain configuration errors, such as the wrong transmission type, can prevent starting of the engine.
Name of the function Position in the diagnostic toolAs delivered configuration
Hands-free function (CF001/002) Door control (LC 001) none
Locking using the hands-free function (CF 019/020) Door control (LC 010) none
Operation of the horn for the hands-free function (CF 021/022 to CF 026)
Door control (LC 011) with
Type of gearbox (CF 703/704) immobiliser (LC 040) manual
Variable power-assisted steering (CF 075/076) variable power-assisted steering (LC 001)
none
Steering strategy number power-assisted steering (LC 002) no. 1
Card function locked (CF 708/709) immobiliser (LC 041) none
Overspeed alarm (Saudi Arabia) (CF618/619) passenger compartment connection unit (LC 048)
none
Activation of automatic memo functions recall (CF 003/004)
door control (LC 002) with
Daytime running lights (CF 600/601) passenger compartment connection unit (LC 049)
none
Bulb monitoring and voice synthesiser (CF 694/695) passenger compartment connection unit (LC 050)
none
Deadlocking of doors (CF 005/006) door control (LC 003) none
Electric childproof locks (CF 007/008) door control (LC 004) none
Central closing of the windows (CF009/010) door control (LC 005) with
Locking in motion (CF 028/029) door control (LC 012) with
Card left in reader warning (CF 711/712) door control (LC 042) with
Inhibition of tyre pressure monitoring system (CF 001/002)
tyres (LC 001) none
Interior lighting (CF 013/014) door control (LC 007) none
Courtesy light timer (CF 015/016) door control (LC 008) with
Opening driver's door using remote control (CF 030/031) door control (LC 013) none
Opening driver's door using hands-free remote control door control (CF 014) none
Driving style (CF 018/019) door control (LC 069) left
Rain sensor (CF 696/697) door control (LC 051) with
87-11
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87UCH configuration
POWER ASSISTED STEERING CONFIGURATION
Using the fault finding tools
! Enter into dialogue with the vehicle and run the Multiplex network test
! Select and confirm the Variable power assisted steering menu
! Confirm the Computer configuration line in the Command menu.
! Presence of variable power assisted steering: – CF 075: with variable power assisted steering– CF 074: without standard power assisted
steering
! Configuration of type of variable power assisted steering depending on the vehicle: CF 076: law number 1
! Confirm the configurations on the Command menu, Reading configuration
CONFIGURATION OF DOOR CONTROL
Using the fault finding tools
! Enter into dialogue with the vehicle and run the Multiplex network test
! Select and confirm the Door control menu
! Confirm the Computer configuration line in the Command menu.
! Operation of the hands-free function: – CF 001: With hands-free function– CF 002: without hands-free function
! Operation of the hands-free locking function: – CF 019: with hands-free locking– CF 020: without hands-free locking
This configuration allows the hands-free function to be used for unlocking the vehicle only.
! Configuration of the horn for the hands-free function: – CF 021: no beep– CF 022 to CF 026: number of beeps
This configuration allows the doors locked beep using the hands-free function to be changed or cancelled.
! Configuration of the deadlocking function– CF 005: with deadlocking– CF 006: without deadlocking
For right-hand drive vehicles fitted with specific door cabling, this configuration allows the internal handles to be released by two presses on the remote control unit.
87-12
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87
! Configuration of the electric childproof locks: – CF 007: with electric childproof locks– CF 008: without electric childproof locks
This configuration allows, depending on the version, disablement of the operation of the rear windows from the rear seats and the release of the internal handles.
! Configuration of closure of the windows by means of a long press on the remote control unit. To operate, the vehicle must be fitted with one touch electric windows (anti-pinch):– CF 009: with centralised window locking– CF 010: without centralised window locking
! Configuration of the automatic locking while driving: – CF 028: automatic locking while driving
authorisation– CF 029: automatic locking while driving
disablementThis configuration allows the operation of automatic locking while driving. Unlocking occurs as soon as the impact signal is received from the air bag computer.Activate or deactivate this function from the passenger compartment with the centralised door locking button.
! Configuration of the interior lighting on opening of the doors: – CF 013: with interior lighting– CF 014: without interior lighting
! Configuration of the lighting timer on closing of the doors: – CF 015: with courtesy light timer– CF 016: without courtesy light timer
! Configuration of country of use: – CF 018: left-hand drive– CF 017: right-hand drive
This configuration allows operation of the deadlocking and the open door only functions.
! Configuration of the driver's seat position memory function:– CF 003: seat automatic recall– CF 004: without seat automatic recall
! Configuration of the open door only function: – CF 030: unlocking all four doors– CF 031: unlocking driver's door
For right-hand drive versions, this configuration allows the driver's door and the tailgate only to be unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked (simple or hands-free). Press again to unlock the other openings.
! Configuration of the open door only function with the hands-free function: – CF 032: hands-free unlocking of all four doors– CF 027: hands-free unlocking of driver's door
This configuration is identical to the preceding one for hands-free operation.
! Confirm the configurations on the Command menu, Reading configuration
87-13
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTUCH configuration 87
WARNING: certain configuration errors, such as the wrong transmission type, can prevent the engine starting.
CONFIGURATION OF THE CONNECTION UNIT
Using the fault finding tools
! Enter into dialogue with the vehicle and run the Multiplex network test
! Select and confirm the Connection unit menu
! Confirm the Computer configuration line in the Command menu.
! Configuration of the overspeed: – CF 618: with overspeed (Saudi Arabia)– CF 619: without overspeed (Saudi Arabia)
! Configuration of the daytime running lights: – CF 600: with daytime running lights– CF 601: without daytime running lights
! Configuration of the voice synthesiser: – CF 694: with voice synthesiser– CF 695: without voice synthesiser
! Configuration of rain sensor: – CF 696: with rain sensor– CF 697: without rain sensor
! Confirm the configurations on the Command menu, Reading configuration
CONFIGURATION OF THE ENGINE IMMOBILISER
Using the fault finding tools
! Enter into dialogue with the vehicle and run the Multiplex network test
! Select and confirm the Engine immobiliser menu
! Confirm the Computer configuration line in the Command menu.
! Configuration of gearbox type: – CF 703: with automatic transmission– CF 704: without automatic transmission
! Configuration of RENAULT Card locking in the reader (for version with automatic transmission only): – CF 709: with card locking– CF 601: without card locking
! Configuration of the RENAULT Card left in the reader after engine stopped alert: – CF 711: with Card left alert– CF 712: without Card left alert
! Confirm the configurations on the Command menu, Reading configuration
NOTE: refer to the relevant section for configurations concerning the tyre pressure monitoring system.
87-14
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87Tyre pressure monitoring system
DESCRIPTION
The system consists of:! four pressure sensors (1) incorporated into the
valves (one per wheel). They transmit a radio signal,! a receiver (2) located under the vehicle, collects and
decodes the information from the sensors and sends it to the UCH,
! the UCH (3) receives the information from the receiver (2), processes it and decides on the message to be displayed,
! a display (4) (specific or integrated into the instrument panel).
87-15
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87
87-16
GENERAL
This system constantly monitors the pressure of the four tyres of the vehicle (the spare wheel is not monitored).In operation, the system uses:! four pressure sensors (incorporating the tyre valve),
one in each wheel of the vehicle (except the spare wheel),
! a receiver located underneath the vehicle,! an electronic controller integrated into the UCH,! warning lights indicating the nature of the fault,! a display representing the vehicle which allows the
faulty tyre to be located. On top-of-the-range instrument panels, the display shows the tyre pressures every time the vehicle is started and whenever there is a problem.
Special notes:Each sensor is identified by a coloured marking round the valve:– Green = front left– Yellow = front right– Red = rear left– Black = rear right
WARNING: always observe this colour coding in order to read the right information in the right place on the vehicle display(s) (depending on equipment option). Each sensor is recognised by the UCH by means of a unique code. If a sensor is replaced, its code must be programmed into the UCH according to its position on the vehicle and it must be identified using the correct colour marking (see the section Replacing a sensor).
The tyre pressure monitoring system:
! indicates the pressure of the tyres when the ignition is switched on to within 0.1 bar (depending on version).
! warns the driver when:! the pressure is less than 0.6 bar above the
recommended pressure,! the pressure is too high,! a tyre has an abnormal leak,! a tyre is defective,! a difference in pressure occurs between the left
and right wheels.
NOTE: consult section 07 General Information of Workshop Repair Manual 339, or the label located in the door pillar, for the pressures recommended for your vehicle.
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87
87-17
Pressure sensor
The pressure sensor consists of:! a standard valve! a pressure sensor! a radio transmitter (specific to the wheel),! a battery which cannot be removed.
NOTE: the pressure sensor valve battery cannot be replaced (refer to section 35 Replacing the valve).
19035
Reminder: each sensor is identified with a specific colour marking. When replacing the valve or tyre, or removing the wheels, it is essential to observe the colour coding:! Green = front left! Yellow = front right! Red = rear left! Black = rear right
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87
87-18
OPERATION
The sensors (powered by an integrated battery) regularly measure the internal pressure of the tyres and transmit this data, together with a code identifying the sensor, by radio.
NOTE: the UCH is capable of identifying a second set of wheel sensors. Observe the colour coding of the sensors according to their location.
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87
87-19
RADIO RECEIVER
OPERATION
The receiver located under the vehicle receives the messages transmitted by the pressure sensors.
It sends them by cable to the UCH, which controls the instrument panel displays, after a processing procedure designed to detect leaks (punctures) or under-inflation.
The driver is notified by:! warning lights indicating the nature of the fault
(puncture, flat tyre...)! a symbol display representing the vehicle, which
identifies the faulty tyre.! a display integrated into the top-of-the-range
instrument panel which indicates the tyre pressures on startup and in the event of a warning (refer to section 83).
CONNECTION
18388
TRACK Description
1 UCH connection
2 Earth
3 Not in use
4 before ignition
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTTyre pressure monitoring system 87
PROGRAMMING PRESSURE SENSORS IN THE UCH
REMINDER: each sensor is marked with a different colour:! Green = front left! Yellow = front right! Red = rear left! Black = rear right
There are several methods for programming a sensor code in the UCH. A fault-finding tool (except XR25) must be used for these operations:! manual writing of the valve code. This is shown on a
label on the sensor,! programming the code using the Ms. 1607 valve
exciter tool,! programming by driving the vehicle.! programming without driving (the valve transmits its
code every 15 minutes if there is no puncture)
MANUAL VALVE CODE PROGRAMMING (WRITING THE CODE)
1 With the ignition switched on, use the fault finding tool to set up a dialogue with UCH then select Tyres.
2 Select the Command mode then Specific command menus,
3 Confirm line “SC 001: programming a valve code”4 Key in the maximum six-digit code as shown on the
label on the sensor.5 Confirm the position of the wheel fitted with this
sensor on the vehicle6 Enter the wheel's season of use (the summer set is
used as the default if the vehicle only has one set of wheels)
NOTE: the procedure is identical for programming the four valves using the “SC 002: programming codes for the four valves” command
AUTOMATIC VALVE CODE PROGRAMMING USING THE VALVE EXCITER (Ms. 1706)
1 With the ignition switched on, use the fault finding tool to set up a dialogue with UCH then select Tyres.
2 Select the Command mode then Specific command menus
3 Confirm line “SC 001: programming a valve code”4 On the tool, choose the position on the vehicle of the
valve to be memorised.5 Position tool Ms. 1607 against the tyre under the
valve concerned.6 Press the Ms. 1607 tool switch once.7 Wait until the indicator light comes on to signify that
programming is completed.8 The fault finding tool signals that the valve code has
been received.9 Confirm the position of the wheel fitted with this
sensor on the vehicle10Enter the wheel's season of use (the summer set is
used as the default if the vehicle only has one set of wheels)
NOTE: the procedure is identical for programming the four valves using the “SC 002: programming codes for the four valves” command
AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING OF THE VALVE CODE BY DEFLATING A TYRE
1 With the ignition switched on, use the fault finding tool to set up a dialogue with UCH then select Tyres.
2 Create a leak of about 1 bar on a tyre3 Select the Command mode then Specific
command menus4 Confirm line SC 001: programming a valve code”5 Carry out a road test6 Confirm the position of the wheel fitted with this
sensor on the vehicle7 Enter the wheel's season of use (the summer set is
used as the default if the vehicle only has one set of wheels)
8 Reinflate the tyre9 Repeat the operation for each valve to be
memorised.
87-20
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87Keyless vehicle: RENAULT Card
The system fitted to the keyless vehicle consists of:! the UCH,! an uncoded card reader (radio receiver and transponder),! a push-button to start and stop the engine,! the steering column lock which mechanically locks the steering wheel,! door locking/unlocking motors! key-cards with two or three buttons (hands-free version),! two specific aerials for transmission (communication) to the key-card in the hands-free version (depending on
vehicle version),! specific exterior door handles for the hands-free option (depending on vehicle version),! specific interior door locks for the deadlocking function (depending on vehicle version),
87-21
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87
87-22
DESCRIPTION
Two RENAULT Cards are assigned to the vehicle in the factory. Depending on its equipment level, the vehicle may be supplied with:
! two RENAULT Cards with two buttons (without hands-free system) fitted with:– a coded chip which works without a battery and
operates the immobiliser (refer to section 82),– a plip remote control unit which operates the
locking and unlocking of the doors.
The radio frequency code transmitted by these RENAULT Cards is continuously changed to avoid possible copying.
With this system, the remote control units are resynchronised automatically.
The remote control unit is only used for locking and unlocking the doors (it has no effect on the immobiliser).
NOTE: the UCH can manage four different codes (maximum of four RENAULT Cards).
! two RENAULT Cards, one of which is fitted with a hands-free system (three buttons). This system allows the opening surfaces to be opened without action on the remote control unit. (It is not possible to have more than one hands-free remote control unit per vehicle, see Hands-free RENAULT Card section).
NOTES:! A spare key allowing access to the vehicle if the
remote control fails to operate is integrated into each RENAULT Card. (To operate a spare key, make sure you have the security number).
! If the vehicle battery charge is low, it is not possible to unlock the steering lock. It is not possible to push-start the vehicle.
18249 CARD WITHOUT HANDS-FREE OPTION
18249-1 CARD WITH HANDS-FREE OPTION
18249-2
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card 87
87-23
IMMOBILISATION USING A TRANSPONDER
The immobiliser system using a transponder incorporated in the RENAULT Card unlocks the steering lock, switches on the ignition and authorises starting of the vehicle.
The RENAULT Card is recognised by the receiver integrated into the reader when the card is inserted (see section 82: Immobiliser).
OPERATION: SWITCHING ON THE IGNITION AND STARTING
The RENAULT Card reader has two positions:
! the + accessories position via the accessories relay (when the RENAULT Card is about half-way in). This position supplies:! the radio,! the electric windows,! the passenger compartment fan,! the electric seats.
NOTE: supply to the accessories relay is cut during the starting phase. If the RENAULT Card is inadvertently left in the reader, supply to the accessories relay is cut after a delay of about 40 seconds.
! the after ignition feed position. This position authorises starting of the engine via the push-button.
The after ignition relay is supplied as soon as the RENAULT Card is fully inserted into the reader, provided the card is identified by the UCH and the steering lock is unlocked.
Supply to the relay is cut as soon as you press the push-button to stop the engine, if the vehicle speed is zero (see Engine start push-buttonsection) or after a delay of 40 minutes without the engine having been started.
! the engine start push-button supplies the starter motor until it receives the engine running signal. If the vehicle does not start, the supply to the starter motor is cut after a delay which varies according to the coolant temperature.
For engine startup to be authorised, certain conditions must be met (see the Engine start push-button section).
NOTE: the RENAULT Card is locked in the reader when the engine is running. It is unlocked when the engine is stopped, if the vehicle speed is zero or nearly zero.
18830
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Standard RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Standard RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Standard RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Standard RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Standard RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Standard RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Standard RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Standard RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Standard RENAULT Card 87Keyless vehicle: Standard RENAULT Card
OPERATION OF SIMPLE REMOTE CONTROLS (WITHOUT HANDS-FREE SYSTEM)
In operation, this system uses:! a RENAULT Card (A),! a radio receiver integrated into the RENAULT Card reader (B),! an electronic controller integrated into the UCH (C),! an engine start push-button (D),! the door locks,! a red 'door locked' warning light,! the vehicle direction indicators,! the injection computer (E),! the clutch pedal sensors (F) and gearbox neutral position sensors,! the electric steering lock (G).
87-24
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Standard RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Standard RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Standard RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Standard RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Standard RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Standard RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Standard RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Standard RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Standard RENAULT Card 87
87-25
The simple RENAULT Card has two buttons:– a locking button (1),– an unlocking button (2).
! Press the Lock button to lock the vehicle doors.The locking of the doors by remote control may be indicated by flashing of the hazard lights (provided all the doors are closed properly). The red locking warning light is illuminated.If one or more of the doors are not closed properly, the hazard lights remain off after remote control locking.
! To unlock the vehicle doors, press the Unlock button.Unlocking of the doors may be indicated by a flash of the hazard lights.
NOTE: Flashing of the hazard warning lights while the remote control is being used is controlled by the UCH (see section entitled Hazard warning lights).
NOTES:! The central door locking button is blocked once the
doors have been locked by the remote control.
! Certain vehicles (right-hand drive version) are fitted with deadlocking, which locks the doors in a way which prevents opening from inside the vehicle. To deadlock the vehicle, press twice in succession or press and hold the Lock button (1). This function uses additional specific locking motors.
! Right-hand drive vehicles may be fitted with driver's door unlocking only. This function allows the driver's door only to be unlocked when the RENAULT Card is pressed briefly. The button must be pressed twice in succession to unlock all the doors.
! For vehicles fitted with one touch electric windows or an electric sunroof, pressing and holding the Lock button (1) will lock all the opening elements (these must have been initialised).
! If a door is not properly shut when the Lock button is pressed, the doors will lock then unlock automatically.
18249 SIMPLE CARD 18834
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87Keyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card
OPERATION OF THE REMOTE CONTROL UNIT FITTED WITH THE HANDS-FREE SYSTEM
In operation, this system uses:! a hands-free RENAULT Card (A),! a card reader (B),! an electronic controller integrated into the UCH (C),! an engine start push-button (D),! the injection computer (E),! the clutch pedal sensors (F) and gearbox neutral position sensors,! the electric steering lock (G),! presence sensors for each door handle (H),! a red 'door locked' warning light,! the vehicle direction indicators,! two specific aerials for hands-free transmission (I),! specific interior door locks for the deadlocking function (J),! horn (K).
19242-1
87-26
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87
87-27
The RENAULT hands-free card has three buttons:– a locking button (1). This button locks the doors and
inhibits the hands-free function.– an unlocking button(2). This button unlocks the
doors and inhibits the hands-free function.– a locking button with activation of the hands-free
system (3).
NOTES:This remote control unit can be used without the hands-free system after inhibiting the system by means of buttons (1) and (2). In this case, operation is then identical to that of the simple remote control unit.
To lock the doors of the vehicle using the hands-free system (press the button (3) if hands-free function has been inhibited):
! close the doors and the luggage compartment,! take the RENAULT Card away from the vehicle.
Once the card is out of communication range with the UCH (via the radio aerials), the doors and the luggage compartment lock.Locking of the doors by the remote control unit is indicated the hazard warning lights flashing, the horn sounding and illumination of the red warning light.If one or more of the doors are not locked properly, the hazard lights remain off after remote control locking.
NOTE: pressing the locking or opening buttons on the RENAULT card deactivates the hands-free function. The hands-free RENAULT Card then functions as a simple RENAULT Card. Pressing the auto button on the RENAULT Card reactivates the system after about 3 seconds.
WARNING: locking using the hands-free function can be disabled by the diagnostic tools.
18249-1 HANDS-FREE CARD
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free RENAULT Card 87
87-28
To unlock the doors of the vehicle using the hands-free system (press the button (3) if hands-free function has been inhibited):
! approach the vehicle, so that the RENAULT Card comes within communication range of the UCH,
! place your hand behind one of the door handles or open the luggage compartment,
! the presence sensors in the handles initiate hands-free interrogation of the vehicle.
! If the card is recognised, the vehicle unlocks. This is shown by the hazard warning lights flashing.
NOTE: Flashing of the hazard warning lights when the remote control is being used is controlled by the UCH (see section entitled hazard warning lights).
RENAULT CARD POWER SUPPLY
! RENAULT Card remote control units are powered by a battery. The battery charge status is indicated by the warning light (1).
! for the hands-free function, the 3-button RENAULT Card is fitted with a rechargeable battery. It is charged when the RENAULT Card is inserted in the reader. In twenty minutes of charging, the rechargeable battery restores a day's discharge. A full recharge can take 24 hours. This rechargeable battery cannot be removed.
! the transponder, the immobiliser in the RENAULT Card, does not have a power supply.
WARNING: the normal battery is also used for the hands-free function.
18249-1 HANDS-FREE CARD
18249
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Side repeaters 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Side repeaters 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Side repeaters 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Side repeaters 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Side repeaters 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Side repeaters 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Side repeaters 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Side repeaters 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Side repeaters 87Keyless vehicle: Side repeaters
The direction indicators and side repeaters are controlled by the UCH to confirm unlocking and locking of the doors.
Defect mode operation
When the lock command is given:– none of the doors, nor the tailgate, will lock if the driver's door is open,– if the luggage compartment or a door is open, the direction indicators and side repeaters will not light and hands-
free locking will not be possible.
Press on the RENAULT Card Effect on the locksOperation of the
direction indicators
Operation of the side repeaters
Operation of the horn
Locking
1 short presslocking of the doors
and luggage compartment
2 flashes 2 flashes -
2 short pressesdeadlocking of the doors and luggage
compartmentrapid flashing rapid flashing -
1 long press****closing of the windows and
sunroof*2 flashes rapid flashing -
hands-free mode
locking of the doors and luggage compartment
2 flashessteady
illumination for about 10 seconds
1 signal (configurable)
Unlocking
1 short press
unlocking of the doors and luggage compartment or the
driver's door**
1 flash 1 flash -
2 short pressesunlocking of the
doors and luggage compartment***
- - -
hands-free mode
unlocking of the doors and luggage compartment or the
driver's door**
1 flash 1 flash -
***
*******
for this function, the vehicle must be fitted with one touch electric windows and anti-pinch electric sunroof.Some right-hand drive vehicles may be fitted with driver's door unlocking only. This function allows the driver's door and luggage compartment only to be unlocked by pressing the RENAULT Card briefly.unlocking of the doors and luggage compartment for vehicles fitted with driver's door only unlocking.on certain right-hand drive versions, this function is preceded by deadlocking.
87-29
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card reader 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card reader 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card reader 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card reader 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card reader 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card reader 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card reader 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card reader 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: RENAULT Card reader 87
87-30
Keyless vehicle: RENAULT Card reader
The RENAULT Card reader contains two contacts which control vehicle operation:! a contact located half-way into the card slot, which
controls power supply to accessories (+ ACCESSORIES),
! a contact at the end of the card slot (+ AFTER IGNITION).
NOTE: the RENAULT Card is locked in the reader once the UCH has received the engine running signal from the injection computer. It is released when the engine is stopped.
the RENAULT Card reader also functions as:! a radio receiver for locking and unlocking the doors,! a transponder aerial for the immobiliser function and
recognition of the RENAULT Card (see immobiliser section).
! non-recognition of the RENAULT Card indicator light.! interior lighting.
18320
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Engine start push-button 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Engine start push-button 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Engine start push-button 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Engine start push-button 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Engine start push-button 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Engine start push-button 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Engine start push-button 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Engine start push-button 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Engine start push-button 87
87-31
Keyless vehicle: Engine start push-button
DESCRIPTION
The single push-button (START/STOP) is used to both start and stop the engine.
There are two indicator light possibilities:! upper light white: invitation to start,! lower light green: engine running. This lighting is
dimmed when the side lights are on.
OPERATION
Engine start is authorised when the upper part of the button is illuminated.
Starting is 'one touch': A single press of the button is enough to start the engine.
To start the engine:
! insert the card all the way into the reader to switch on the ignition and release the steering lock.
! verify that the start-up conditions are met:
NOTE:– on diesel vehicles, the starter motor cannot be
operated during the preheating phase.– an incorrectly configured gearbox type in the UCH
may make starting impossible.– the gearbox must be in neutral or the clutch pedal
depressed.
18320
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Engine start push-button 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Engine start push-button 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Engine start push-button 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Engine start push-button 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Engine start push-button 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Engine start push-button 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Engine start push-button 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Engine start push-button 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Engine start push-button 87
87-32
! The electric steering lock must be released and the ignition must be on.
! Ensure that the system has authorised engine starting:– If the upper part of the button is lit, starting is
possible,
! Press the button to send the start command to the UCH. The UCH analyses the engine status (running, stalled, sustained idle, stopped). If the engine is stopped and the conditions are met, the UCH orders the starting relay to be supplied.
NOTE:– It only possible to start the engine if the steering lock
is released.– The RENAULT Card is locked when the engine is
running.– If the engine stalls, a single press on the starting
button will restart the engine.
To stop the engine:
Press the button to send the 'stop engine' command to the UCH. This verifies that the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h) before cutting the + after ignition feed supply.
REMINDER: The engine is started by pressing the push-button. When the invitation to start is present, the press on the button (START/STOP) is memorised by the UCH. The starter motor is supplied with power as soon as the UCH authorises it, and until receipt of the 'engine running' signal. If the engine does not start, the supply to the starter motor is cut after a period which varies according to the engine coolant temperature.
NOTE: certain vehicle failures originating in the RENAULT Card reader, the clutch pedal or NEUTRAL position sensors (automatic transmission version) can modify engine starting. In this case, the starter motor is supplied by continuous pressure on the engine start push-button.
CONDITIONS REQUIRED FOR STARTING THE ENGINE! RENAULT Card fully inserted into the reader,! + after ignition connected,! transponder (integrated into the RENAULT Card)
recognised,! manual gearbox in neutral,! automatic gearbox in Neutral or Park position,! clutch pedal depressed, for the manual gearbox.
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Electric steering lock 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Electric steering lock 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Electric steering lock 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Electric steering lock 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Electric steering lock 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Electric steering lock 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Electric steering lock 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Electric steering lock 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Electric steering lock 87
87-33
Keyless vehicle: Electric steering lock
The steering column lock is located at the base of the steering column. It is controlled by the UCH.
The lock is coded by the UCH, the code cannot be erased (refer to section 82).
OPERATION
The steering is unlocked when the RENAULT Card is fully inserted into the reader and the transponder is recognised by the UCH.The steering is locked when the RENAULT Card is fully withdrawn from the reader, the engine is stopped and the vehicle speed is zero.
NOTE: if the UCH has received an impact signal from the air bag computer, the steering column lock remains unlocked. The vehicle must be driven to reset it.
NOTES:! If the lock is not released when the key-card is fully
inserted into the reader, the red immobiliser warning light will stay on but the + after ignition feed will not be authorised.
! If internal steering lock faults occur, the Stop and Service warning lights may come on. The steering lock remains unlocked.
IMPORTANT: a faulty or disconnected steering lock will prevent the engine being started.
18541
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Door handle sensors 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Door handle sensors 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Door handle sensors 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Door handle sensors 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Door handle sensors 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Door handle sensors 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Door handle sensors 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Door handle sensors 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Door handle sensors 87
87-34
Keyless vehicle: Door handle sensors
To allow operation of the hands-free RENAULT Card, each of the door handles is fitted with a presence sensor. This sensor detects the presence of the driver's hand and initiates the hands-free interrogation.
The presence sensor, located on the back of the handle, is accompanied by a reflector and a handle movement switch.
After a long period of inactivity, the door handle sensor is relayed by a door handle movement sensor.
NOTE: For removal of the handle, refer to the Bodywork section. For track allocation of the presence and handle movement sensors, refer to section 84.
For the luggage compartment, the sensor is replaced by a switch integrated into the electric opening handle.
NOTE: For removal of the handle, refer to the Bodywork section. For track allocation of the luggage compartment handle, refer to section 84.
18993 DOOR HANDLE
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free aerial 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free aerial 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free aerial 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free aerial 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free aerial 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free aerial 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free aerial 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free aerial 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Hands-free aerial 87
87-35
Keyless vehicle: Hands-free aerial
To operate in hands-free mode, vehicles are fitted with two specific aerials located:! in the roof for detection close to the front doors,
To replace the roof aerial, it is necessary to remove the interior trim.Attach the new aerial, respecting the routing and connection of the wiring. (refer to the section Bodywork).
! in the rear bumper to cover the rear of the vehicle and to allow opening of the luggage compartment.
WARNING: the reception range of a hands-free aerial is not fixed. It changes constantly, depending on the presence of objects close to the vehicle and climatic conditions.
18827 ROOF AERIAL
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Reallocation of a RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Reallocation of a RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Reallocation of a RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Reallocation of a RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Reallocation of a RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Reallocation of a RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Reallocation of a RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Reallocation of a RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Reallocation of a RENAULT Card 87
87-36
Keyless vehicle: Reallocation of a RENAULT Card
Replacement, reallocation or addition of one or more RENAULT Cards
IMPORTANT: only RENAULT Cards submitted during this procedure will work. To be assigned to the vehicle, they must meet the following conditions:! they have already been coded on this vehicle,! or they are new (not coded).
Using the diagnostic tool:
! Enter into dialogue with the engine immobiliser (UCH).
! Confirm the SC001: Card programming line in the Specific command item of the Command menu.
! The tool displays Please enter the After Sales code; ensure that there is no RENAULT Card in the reader and enter the secret After Sales code (hexadecimal characters) and confirm it.! If a card is present in the reader, the screen
displays Remove the card from the reader! If the code read operation is unsuccessful, the
screen displays Verify the After Sales code and make sure the card belongs to the vehicle. Verify the code then retry input.
! If the UCH is unprogrammed, the tool displays Insert a card already programmed to the vehicle (refer to section 83).
WARNING: the maximum time between each operation is 5 minutes, otherwise the procedure will be cancelled and the tool will display the message Procedure interrupted: warning, the cards assigned to the vehicle are the ones assigned before the procedure was started. The cards submitted before interruption of the procedure are no longer blank and can only be assigned to this vehicle.
! If the code entered is correct and the UCH is not unprogrammed, the reallocation procedure can commence, the screen displays Do you want to check the cards before assigning them to the vehicle?.
! If you want to check the cards, the tool displays Insert the card fully into the reader. Insert a RENAULT Card until the ignition is switched on:! If the Allocation is not possible, the screen displays
Verify the After Sales code and make sure the card belongs to the vehicle. Insert another card.
! If the card is accepted, the screen displays Remove the card from the reader.
! The tool displays Insert the card fully into the reader. Insert a RENAULT Card fully into the reader.! if the RENAULT Card is not accepted, the red
warning light remains off.! if the RENAULT Card is accepted, the red warning
light flashes rapidly and the tool displays 1 card programmed then Remove the card from the reader.
! The tool displays Insert the card fully into the reader. Insert another RENAULT Card fully into the reader.
NOTE: If the same RENAULT Card is submitted twice, the system does not acknowledge the second card insertion and the immobiliser warning light remains off.
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Reallocation of a RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Reallocation of a RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Reallocation of a RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Reallocation of a RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Reallocation of a RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Reallocation of a RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Reallocation of a RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Reallocation of a RENAULT Card 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Reallocation of a RENAULT Card 87
87-37
! Insert the RENAULT Card or the other Cards to be assigned to the vehicle (maximum 4) into the reader. The screen displays 2, 3 or 4 cards programmed then Remove the card from the reader.
WARNING: these must be old RENAULT Cards for the vehicle or new non-coded RENAULT Cards.
NOTE: the vehicle can only accept a single RENAULT Card having the hands-free function. If a second card is assigned to the vehicle, it will function as an ordinary RENAULT Card.
IMPORTANT: In the event that not all the RENAULT Cards are available, it will be necessary to carry out a subsequent reallocation procedure using all the cards.
NOTE: It is possible to cancel the RENAULT Card reallocation procedure during its execution.
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Defect mode 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Defect mode 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Defect mode 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Defect mode 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Defect mode 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Defect mode 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Defect mode 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Defect mode 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Defect mode 87Keyless vehicle: Defect mode
Normal operation Cause Effect Remedy
Hands-free operation (locking
and unlocking)
Rechargeable battery low
! Hands-free locking not possible: press the remote control lock button to lock the vehicle.
! Hands-free locking operates normally.
RENAULT Card left in the vehicle for 15 minutes
! Hands-free locking not possible: press the remote control lock button to lock the vehicle.
! Hands-free locking operates normally.
Switch on to recharge the rechargeable battery or launch tool command.
Rechargeable battery not discharged
Hands-free mode totally inactive
Battery not dischargedRemote control operation (hands-free or simple) not possible
Replace battery.
87-38
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Diagram 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Diagram 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Diagram 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Diagram 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Diagram 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Diagram 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Diagram 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Diagram 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Diagram 87
87-39
Keyless vehicle: Diagram
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Diagram 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Diagram 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Diagram 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Diagram 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Diagram 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Diagram 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Diagram 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Diagram 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTKeyless vehicle: Diagram 87
87-40
120
247
645
675
721
756
886
967
1016
1087
1082
1083 → 1086
1088
1109
Injection computer
Instrument panel
UCH
Clutch pedal switch
ABS computer
Air bag computer
Hands-free aerial
Acoustic warning signal
Relay/fuse box
Engine start/stop button
RENAULT Card reader
Presence sensors
Electric steering lock
Gearbox neutral sensor
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87
87-41
Electric windows
General
Vehicles may be fitted with one of three types of electric window depending on their version:! simple electric window (except on driver's door),! one touch anti-pinch electric window on the driver's door only or on all doors,! one touch electric window with multiplex connection.
NOTE: the one touch function is always accompanied by the anti-pinch function. When an obstacle is encountered in the final section of the window's upward travel, the window is stopped then lowered about 2 inches (5 cm). The obstacle is detected by measuring the current used by the motor, while the position of the window is measured by a Hall effect sensor located in the motor. This anti-pinch function is adjustable according to the battery voltage and the vehicle speed.
! simple electric window (except on the driver's door)This standard system allows opening and closing by a simple switch.
! one touch anti-pinch electric window In this case, the switches have two stops. The window movement is stopped by detection of the upper or lower stop, by another command or after a delay of 10 seconds.This version allows the driver to close the windows by a long press on the RENAULT Card when the doors are locked. For automatic closure, the motors are controlled with a time-lag between them. This function is configurable by the diagnostic tools.
! one touch anti-pinch electric window with multiplex connectionThis version allows the position of the external rear-view mirrors to be stored. The information is stored in the electric window computer (for each side) and delivered to the rear-view mirrors (refer to the Storing the driver's seat position section).
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87
87-42
19243
! simple electric window (except on driver's door),
Diagram
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87
87-43
Components
A One touch window motor, front, driver's sideB Simple window motor, front, passenger sideC Simple window motor, rear left sideD Simple window motor, rear right sideE UCHF Electric window control, driver's sideG Electric window control, passenger sideH Electric window control, rearI Electric window inhibitor switch, rear
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87
87-44
19244
! one touch anti-pinch electric window on the driver's door only or on all doors,
Diagram
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87
87-45
Components
A One touch window motor, front, driver's sideB One touch window motor, front, passenger sideC One touch window motor, rear left sideD One touch window motor, rear right sideE UCHF Electric window control, driver's sideG Electric window control, passenger sideH Electric window control, rearI Electric window inhibitor switch, rear
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87
87-46
19245
! one touch electric window with multiplex connection.
Diagram
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87
87-47
Components
A One touch window motor, multiplex, front, driver's sideB One touch window motor, multiplex, front, passenger sideC One touch window motor, rear left sideD One touch window motor, rear right sideE UCHF Electric window control, driver's sideG Electric window control, passenger sideH Electric window control, rearI Electric window inhibitor switch, rearJ rear-view mirror controlK rear-view mirrors
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87
87-48
REPLACEMENT
The motor cannot be replaced alone. Its replacement requires replacement of the whole mechanism.
The method is identical in all versions of electric window motor.
IMPORTANT: the motor of a one touch electric window must be initialised when it has been replaced. A non-initialised motor will only operate in steps of about 2 inches (5 centimetres) (see Initialisation section).
REMOVAL OF THE FRONT ELECTRIC WINDOW MECHANISM
Removal of the electric window mechanism requires removal of the door interior trim (refer to the Bodywork section).
90506010
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87
87-49
! Remove the two window retaining clips, release the window from the window drive carrier spindles,
! Manually position the window in the up position, retain it in place with adhesive tape,
! Remove the five mechanism mounting bolts,
! Disconnect the power supply connector,! Remove the window via the lower opening of the
door box section.
REFITTING
To refit, proceed in the reverse order of removal.
Initialise the motor of the one touch window (refer to the Initialisation section.)
NOTE: the motors must be initialised if they are to operate automatically when the doors are locked using the RENAULT Card. (see the Initialisation section) and the UCH must be configured.
18595
18694
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87
REMOVAL OF THE REAR ELECTRIC WINDOW MOTOR
Removal of the electric window mechanism requires removal of the door interior trim.
Remove the window retaining clip.
Release the window from the spindle of the window drive carrier,
Manually position the window in the up position.
Retain it in position with adhesive tape.
Remove the three mechanism securing bolts.
Disconnect the power supply connector.
Remove the window via the lower opening of the door box section.
90507510
18596
18692
87-50
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87
REFITTING
To refit, proceed in the reverse order of removal.
Initialise the motor of the one touch window (refer to the Initialisation section.)
NOTE: the motors must be initialised if they are to operate automatically when the doors are locked using the RENAULT Card. (see the Initialisation section) and the UCH must be configured.
INITIALISATION
This operation must be performed after every interruption of the power supply (fault or removal of battery).
! With the ignition on,! lower the window to the lower stop,! maintain pressure on the switch for a few seconds,! raise the window to the upper stop,! maintain pressure on the switch for a few seconds,! the motor is now initialised, repeat the operation for
all the one touch windows.
NOTE: if a motor is not initialised, it operates in 5 centimetre (2 inch) steps.
CONNECTIONS
! simple electric window motor
! anti-pinch electric window motor
TRACK Description
1 Raise window control
2 Lower window control
TRACK Description
1 Raise window control
2 Lower window control
3 Earth
4 Battery supply
5 Not in use
6 UCH connection
87-51
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric windows 87
! multiplex anti-pinch electric window motor
The passenger side multiplex electric window motor contains a computer to control the storable functions of the rear-view mirrors (refer to the Storage of the driver's seat position section).
TRACK Description
1 Rear-view mirror left/right motor control (track 2A)
2 rear-view mirror motor common (tracks 2C/3C)
3 Lower passenger window
4 Rear-view mirror control connection (driver's side track 6)
5 Rear-view mirror control connection (driver's side track 3)
6 Rear-view mirror control connection (driver's side track 8)
7Potentiometer signal of the up/down motor of the driver's rear-view mirror (track 2 D)
8 Raise passenger window
9 Not in use
10 Power supply
11 Rear-view mirror up/down motor control (track 2B)
12 Rear-view mirror tilt motor control (track 3B)
13 Rear-view mirror control connection (driver's side track 7)
14 Lower driver's side window
15 Not in use
16 rear-view mirror potentiometer common (track 2F)
17 Earth
18 Not in use
19 Multiplex connection between the rear-view mirrors (specific to the driver's seat position memory function)
20 Earth
21 rear-view mirror potentiometer common (track 2G)
22 Rear-view mirror control connection (driver's side track 9)
23 Raise driver's side window
24 Rear-view mirror control connection (driver's side track 5)
25 Rear-view mirror control connection (driver's side track 1)
26 Rear-view mirror up/down motor control (track 2E)
27 UCH connection (locking or storable seat position signal)
28 Not in use
29 Multiplex connection between the rear-view mirrors
30 Not in use
87-52
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87
87-53
Electric sunroof
GENERAL
The electric sunroof is a tilting/sliding sunroof operated by a single motor: tilting (three positions) or sliding (six positions).
The electric sunroof has an anti-pinch function which is adjusted according to the speed of the vehicle.
WARNING: the anti-pinch mode is only operational if the sunroof has been correctly initialised.
NOTE: the sunroof (slide or tilt) can be closed by a long press (about 2 seconds) on the lock button of the RENAULT Card. This signal is managed by the UCH (refer to section 87) if the UCH has been correctly configured.
In this case, the switch remains in the open position, press it to return to the open position.
IMPORTANT: the sunroof can be operated manually at (C) using an Allen key in the event of a fault in the sunroof motor.
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
Operation of the sunroof is controlled by the switch.
To operate, the sunroof motor must receive authorisation from the UCH:! 0 volt signal: authorisation for sunroof movement
(open or close)! + 12 volt signal: no authorisation for movement of the
sunroof! Opening Cyclic Ratio signal: automatic closure of the
sunroof by long press on the remote control unit.
18872
18875
tilt area (three positions)slide area (six positions)
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87
87-54
Anti-pinch function
Obstacle detection is based on analysis of the speed of rotation of the motor. An encounter with an obstacle is indicated by a significant variation in motor speed.
Two Hall effect sensors incorporated into the motor generate periodic signals. The speed can thus be determined within half a revolution.
During the initialisation phase, a speed curve is stored by the computer integrated into the motor.
For the anti-pinch function, the computer compares the actual speed of movement with the stored speed.
Depending on the speed variation detected, the system triggers anti-pinch mode.
IMPORTANT: anti-pinch mode is only active if the system is correctly initialised.
NOTE: the anti-pinch function can be disabled in order to overcome a hard point (bent rail, foreign body in the runners). To do this, maintain the press until the sunroof is closed in step-by-step mode. The anti-pinch function is reactivated when the switch is released.
INITIALISATION PROCEDURE
In the event of battery disconnection, an electrical fault or servicing of the sunroof, the system will only operate in manual mode, in short jerky movements.
To perform initialisation:! set the sunroof switch to the maximum tilt position,! press and hold the switch. After two seconds, the
sunroof will tilt to the maximum position in step-by step mode then drop down a few centimetres,
! release the switch,! press the switch again within five seconds,! keep the switch depressed, the sunroof will open
then close in the slide position,! the motor is initialised,! set the switch to stop.
NOTE: the delay between two successive actions must not exceed five seconds during the initialisation procedure, otherwise the computer will start a new initialisation cycle.
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87
87-55
REMOVING THE MOTOR
Remove:– the sunroof switch and its connector,– the roof console and its connector.
Release the connector (1) from its mounting, then disconnect the sunroof motor connector.
Remove the mounting bolts (2).
Release:– the connector mounting,– the sunroof motor.
SPECIAL NOTE REGARDING REMOVAL
The system must be initialised after the motor is refitted.
NOTE: the sunroof motors are different on the saloon and estate versions.
18871 SWITCHES REMOVED
18872 PHOTO WITHOUT ROOF LINING, SHOWING THE MOTORSECURING BOLTS AND MOUNTING
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTElectric sunroof 87
87-56
Allocation of the motor connector
NOTE: the Vehicle speed and Automatic close control signals are issued by the UCH.
Allocation of the switch connector
18936
TRACK Description
1 sunroof control (track A3 of the switch)
2 sunroof control (track B1)
3 sunroof control (track B2)
4 sunroof control (track B3)
5 sunroof control (track A1)
6 Not in use
7 Power supply
8 Vehicle speed signal
9 central opening and closing authorisation signal
10 earth
18937
SWITCH POSITIONTracks1 and 6
Tracks 1 and 5
Tracks 1 and 3
Tracks 1 and 2
Slide position 6 0 0 0 1
Slide position 5 0 0 1 1
Slide position 4 0 0 1 0
Slide position 3 0 1 1 0
Slide position 2 0 1 1 1
Slide position 1 0 1 0 1
Closed 0 1 0 0
Tilt position 1 1 1 0 0
Tilt position 2 1 1 0 1
Tilt position 3 1 1 1 0
Pressed 0 0 0 0
NOTE: 0 = circuit made (closed) 1 = circuit open
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87
87-57
Driver's seat position memory
General
This system consists of a driver's seat and rear-view mirrors with storable positions. The passenger seat is electrically controlled but has no position memory.
The driver two options:! to set the position of the driver's seat and rear-view
mirrors as and when required. This is called Manual mode
! to set or recall the position of the driver's seat and rear-view mirrors in one operation. This is called Automatic mode
Three computers constantly control the position of the adjustable components, analyse the requests of the driver and operate the motors of:! the driver's seat (computer located under the driver's
seat)! the rear-view mirrors (computer integrated into the
motor of each multiplex one touch electric window).
REMINDER: To store a driving position, it is necessary to switch the ignition to the + accessories position and adjust the three seat axes and the two rear-view mirror axes using the manual console. Then press the memo button (long press) to store the positions. These will be stored for the RENAULT Card present in the reader. Storage is confirmed by a beep from the instrument panel.
NOTE: the seat adjustment console does not have a start/stop button.
Description
! the UCH (1)! the seat computer (2)! the seat adjustment console (3)! the door modules (4)
Diagram
DI8700
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87
87-58
! the UCH. Each time a door unlock signal is sent by the radio remote control unit and each time the + accessories position is set, the UCH checks the number of the RENAULT Card.When the driver's door is opened, it sends the card number by cable in order to establish the seat position to be restored.
! the seat computer. This is located under the driver's seat (clipped to the front of the frame). Depending on the way in which it is controlled, this computer may be: – in standby mode (inactive)– in active mode
It changes from standby to active mode when it detects the following information:– + accessories switched on– driver's door unlock signal,– reception of a RENAULT Card remote control signal.
It changes from active to standby mode after a period of about 40 minutes following switching off of the ignition, if the driver's door has not been opened in the meantime. If the driver's door is opened, it immediately changes to standby mode.
Removal of the computer does not require removal of the seat.
! the door modules which allow storage of the rear-view mirror positions. The two electric window motors must be fitted with computers for the driver's seat position memory function.
NOTE: a dedicated multiplex network for driver's seat position memory allows information to be exchanged between the two front door modules.
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87
87-59
! the seat. The seat contains three motors (for the three axial movements): – longitudinal (runners) (1),– seat height (2),– seatback inclination (3).
Each motor has a flexible harness and a reducing gear for transmitting the movement. The motors incorporate position sensors (one for each axial movement).
To remove the motors, refer to the Bodywork section.
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87
87-60
! the adjustment console
This is located on the outer side of the driver's seat, and consists of:! a seat cushion switch (A) for adjusting the fore-and-
aft position and height of the seat,! a seatback switch (B) allowing tilting (reclining) of
the seatback,! a memo button (C) allowing storage or recall of the
driving position settings (driver's seat and external rear-view mirrors).
This button is used thus:– a long press (2 seconds) stores the driving position.
A beep confirms storage.– a one touch press recalls the driving position.
NOTE: pressing a button during recall of the driving position halts movement of the seat and rear-view mirrors.
NOTES:– the driving position settings cannot be recalled when
the vehicle is in motion,– if the stored settings are recalled when the rear-view
mirrors are in the folded position, the motors will be operated after the mirrors have been unfolded.
REMOVAL
The console is attached to the runner cover by three metal clips (D). To remove it, you must press these clips in one by one, sliding your fingers between the seat cushion and the runner cover.
Disconnect and unclip the connector.
18628
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87
87-61
CONNECTION
! Adjustment memory console (driver)
! Passenger console
NOTE: the passenger seat console does not have a memory button. The positions are not stored.
CONTROL POSITION TRACKS
Move seat forward A1 and A3
Raise seat A1 and A4
Move seatback forward A1 and A5
Move seatback back A6 and A5
Move seat cushion back A6 and A3
Lower seat cushion A6 and A4
Store the positions B5 and B2
Description TRACK
Move seatback forward A1
Move seatback back A2
+ accessories A3
Move seat cushion back A4
Earth A5
Lower seat cushion A6
Move seat forward B1
Raise seat B6
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87
87-62
! the computer
CONNECTION
Black connector
White connector
Green connector
TRACK Description
A1 + after ignition
A5 UCH connection
A8 UCH connection
B1 Power supply
B3 Earth
B4 Earth
B6 Power supply
TRACK Description
A3 Control connection B1 (storage)
B1 Runner motor
B2 Seat raise motor
B3 Seatback motor
B5 Motor common
TRACK Description
1 Sensor earth
2 Runner sensor signal
3 Seatback sensor signal
4 Seat height sensor signal
5 Not in use
6 Sensor power supply
7 Not in use
8 Console control connection A6
9 Console control connection A1
10 Console control connection B5
11 Not in use
12 Console control connection B2
13 Console control connection A4
14 Console control connection A3
15 Console control connection A5
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87
87-63
! the door modules
NOTE: consult the Electric windows section for the removal and specifications of the electric window motors.
TRACK Description
1 Rear-view mirror left/right motor control (track 2A)
2 Rear-view mirror motor common (tracks 2C/3C)
3 Lower passenger window
4 Rear-view mirror control connection (driver's side track 6)
5 Rear-view mirror control connection (driver's side track 3)
6 Rear-view mirror control connection (driver's side track 8)
7 Potentiometer signal of the up/down motor of the driver's rear-view mirror (track 2 D)
8 Raise passenger window
9 Not in use
10 Power supply
11 Rear-view mirror up/down motor control (track 2B)
12 Rear-view mirror tilt motor control (track 3B)
13 Rear-view mirror control connection (driver's side track 7)
14 Lower driver's side window
15 Not in use
16 Rear-view mirror potentiometer common (track 2F)
17 Earth
18 Not in use
19 Multiplex connection between the rear-view mirrors (dedicated to the driver's seat position memory function)
20 Earth
21 Rear-view mirror potentiometer common (track 2G)
22 Rear-view mirror control connection (driver's side track 9)
23 Raise driver's side window
24 Rear-view mirror control connection (driver's side track 5)
25 Rear-view mirror control connection (driver's side track 1)
26 Rear-view mirror up/down motor control (track 2E)
27 UCH connection (locking or storable seat position signal)
28 Not in use
29 Multiplex connection between the rear-view mirrors
30 Not in use
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTDriver's seat position memory 87
87-64
! the external rear-view mirrors
Reminder: removal of the external rear-view mirrors does not require removal of the door interior trim.
CONNECTION (fullest version)
18552-1
TRACK Description
1B Rear-view mirror demisting
1C Rear-view mirror demisting
1D Temperature sensor (passenger side)
1E Temperature sensor (passenger side)
1F Not in use
1G Not in use
2A Horizontal movement motor
2B Vertical movement motor
2C Motor common
2D Horizontal position potentiometer
2E Vertical position potentiometer
2F Power supply
2G Earth
2H Not in use
3B Tilt motor
3C Tilt motor
3D Electro-chrome rear-view mirror
3E Electro-chrome rear-view mirror
3F Not in use
3G Not in use
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87Parking assistance
GENERAL
Certain vehicles are fitted with a parking assistance system which notifies the driver, when reversing, of the presence of an obstacle behind the vehicle (pillars, hydrants, other vehicles, etc.)
OPERATION
The system consists of:! four ultrasonic sensors incorporated into the rear bumper,! a dedicated computer (with a diagnostic function),! an acoustic warning transmitter.
The system is activated automatically when reverse gear is selected (this activation is indicated by a short start-up tone). The ultrasonic sensors located in the rear bumper measure the distance between the vehicle and a potential obstacle.
The frequency of the acoustic signal varies with the distance: it is activated when an obstacle is about 5 feet (150 centimetres) from the bumper, its pulse frequency rising until a continuous tone is emitted when the obstacle is about 10 inches (25 centimetres) from the bumper.
NOTE:! to ensure correct operation of the system, verify that the ultrasonic sensors are clean,! when the system detects an operating fault, a beep sounds for about 5 seconds,! sensor function can be intermittent in bad weather or when a bicycle carrier is fitted.
1. Sensors2. Computer3. Beeper
87-65
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87
87-66
COMPUTER
REMOVAL
Remove the interior trim of the right hand side of the luggage compartment (refer to the Bodywork section).
Disconnect the computer connectors and undo the mounting bolts.
REFITTING
Refitting the computer does not pose any special problems.
The computer must be configured using the diagnostic tools after it has been replaced.
! using the NXR, Clip or Optima 5800 diagnostic tools,
! select and confirm parking assistance,! select and confirm the Command menu, then
System configuration ,! select and confirm the vehicle type.! Check the configuration is correct using the Read
configuration menu.
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87
87-67
CONNECTION
NOTE: connector (2) is not used.
CONNECTOR 1 (16 tracks)
CONNECTOR 3 (12 tracks)
* It is possible to disable the parking assistance system when towing the vehicle. To do this, earth the wire of track 5 of connector 1, this will deactivate the system.
The system can also be disabled using the diagnostic tool.
NOTE: the vehicle speed information is not used.
Track Description
1 + after ignition
2 Acoustic warning signal
3 Not used
4 Not used
5 Inhibition *
6 Reverse gear information (UCH
7 Not used
8 Earth
9 Not used
10 Acoustic warning signal
11 Vehicle speed signal
12 Diagnostic connection
13 Not used
14 Not used
15 Not used
16 Not used
Track Description
1 Right-hand inside sensor earth
2 Right-hand inside sensor signal
3 Left-hand inside sensor signal
4 Right-hand outside sensor signal
5 Left-hand outside sensor signal
6 Right hand inside sensor power supply
7 Left-hand inside sensor earth
8 Right-hand outside sensor earth
9 Left-hand outside sensor earth
10 Left hand inside sensor power supply
11 Right hand outside sensor power supply
12 Left hand outside sensor power supply
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87
87-68
ACOUSTIC WARNING BUZZER
REMOVAL
Remove the interior trim of the left hand side of the luggage compartment (refer to the bodywork section).
Disconnect the connector.
Remove the plastic securing rivets.
REFITTING
Refitting the acoustic signal buzzer does not pose any special problems.
Replace the plastic rivets with traditional rivets.
The volume and tone frequency of the acoustic signal can be changed or disabled using the diagnostic tools.
! using the NXR, Clip or Optima 5800 diagnostic tools,
! select and confirm parking assistance,! select and confirm the command menu, then
CF001: beep volume,! select and confirm CF 006: beep tone.! Check the configuration is correct using the read
configuration menu.
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87
87-69
ULTRASONIC SENSORS
The sensors are all identical but the fittings are different:! Special features of the saloon version: the sensors
are incorporated into the bumper strip. There are two bumper part numbers.
! Special features of the estate version: the sensors are clipped into mountings. These mountings are in turn clipped to the bumper. The four mountings are different and non-interchangeable.
REMOVAL
CARE: the sensors are fragile.
The outer metal part of the sensor cannot withstand tool impact.
Remove the bumper and the shock absorbers.
Each sensor is retained inside a housing comprising two side clips and a locating pin.
Open the clips (A) and withdraw the sensor.
Remove the sensor from its housing, taking care not to scratch it.
REFITTING
Position the pin opposite its housing and insert the sensor until the clips engage.
CARE: the sensors are sensitive to heat (temperatures greater than 80˚ C).
19040 SENSOR WITH ITS HOUSING IN PLACE
PHOTO
ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87ELECTRICAL ASSISTANCE EQUIPMENTParking assistance 87
87-70
CONNECTION
Track Description
1 Power supply
2 Signal
3 Earth
WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88
88-1
188WIRINGMultiplexing
DESCRIPTION
The computers on modern vehicles are becoming increasingly powerful, and can perform increasingly complex calculations. To perform these calculations, they need to acquire information from sensors or from other computers.
The multiplex network allows the computers to:! exchange information via a twisted pair of wires
common to all the computers and known as the BUS .! reduce the number of cables and connectors.
The computers must speak the same language (protocol) if they are to communicate between each other using the multiplex network. RENAULT has chosen the CAN protocol.
! the CAN protocolThe bus consists of a twisted pair of non-interchangeable wires, called CAN H and CAN L.The information is transmitted in the form of long-tail pair square wave signals, which gives greater protection against electromagnetic interference and limits radiation. The voltages of the signals transmitted on the bus are strictly differentiated: between 2.5 and 3.5 volts for the CAN H line and between 1.5 and 2.5 volts for the CAN L line.
At each end of the multiplex connections are impedances of 120 ohms.– UCH side ≈ 120 ohms on the CAN UCH line,
(disconnected from the network).– injection computer side≈ 120 ohms on the CAN line
of the computer (disconnected from the network).
See repairing the multiplex network section for measuring the line impedance and performing a multiplex network test.
! The CAN frame:The message sent on the multiplex network is called a frame. It consists of a series of logical levels organised into 5 fields.
⇒ An arbitrage field indicating the addressee(s) and the frame's priority of access to the network.
⇒ A control field.⇒ A field containing the message data.⇒ A control field contributing to the security of the
transmission.⇒ An acknowledgement field indicating that the
frame has been correctly sent over the network.
SPECIAL CASES:– if several computers attempt to send a frame at the
same time, the frame with the highest arbitrage field value will have priority. The other transmissions (with lower priority) will be sent as soon as the most important frame has been sent. Each computer is able to send and receive.
– If a message is incorrect or incorrectly received by a computer, the acknowledgement field will not be validated and the whole message will be rejected.
WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88
88-2
! Repair of the multiplex network
The multiplex network is connected to each of the computers by means of cable joints in the harness.
The diagnostic routine for these lines consists of verifying:! continuity line by line,! insulation from earth and voltage,! line impedance:
≈ 60 ohms between CAN H and CAN L (battery disconnected between terminals 6 and 14 of the diagnostic socket), ≈ 120 ohms on the UCH CAN line, UCH side (disconnected from the network), ≈ 120 ohms on engine management computer CAN line, computer side (disconnected from the network).
! the frames can be displayed using an oscilloscope,! the remaining diagnostic operations can only be
performed with the diagnostic tools (actuator test, measurement of parameters, etc.).
! FAULT FINDING
Multiplex computers fitted with a diagnostic connection incorporate a multiplex network diagnostic routine.
Each computer permanently monitors its capacity to transmit and the regular arrival of messages from other computers. Any fault detected results in one or more present or stored faults on the multiplex network. These faults are grouped in a frame dedicated to the multiplex network diagnostic, using a format common to all the computers.
During servicing, these faults can be displayed by diagnostic tools in order to identify the faulty inter-computer link(s) and to locate and ascertain the nature of the fault.
Each time a diagnostic tool is connected to a vehicle, a multiplex network test is performed by the tool.
! The different multiplex connections on the vehicles
Depending on the equipment level, several multiplex networks may be present on the vehicles:⇒ the vehicle or inter-system multiplex network
(linking ten computers)! Injection! Automatic transmission (depending on
version)! Anti-lock braking system! UCH! Electric steering column lock! Air bag! Air conditioning! Instrument panel! Central Communication Unit! Voice synthesiser
⇒ The private multiplex network (connecting the anti-lock braking system computer and the steering wheel angle sensor).
⇒ The multiplex network for the navigation system.⇒ The multiplex network associated with the driver's
seat position memory option.
WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88
88-3
! Location of the computers in the vehicle
Components
1.2.3.4.
5.6.7.8.9.10.
Anti-lock braking system computerInjection computer,BatteryAutomatic gearbox computer (depending on version)RENAULT Card readerCentral Communication UnitAir conditioning control panelRadio and navigation systemInstrument panel displayMotor of multiplex-connected one touch window
11.12.13.14.15.16.17.18.19.20.
Voice synthesiserSide impact sensorsAir bag computerInstrument panel Electric steering lockUCHXenon bulb computerDriver's seat position memory systemParking assistance system computerCD player
WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88WIRINGMultiplexing 88
88-4
! Location of the diagnosable computers in the vehicle
Components
1. Anti-lock braking system computer2. Injection computer3. Automatic gearbox computer (depending on version)4. Central Communication Unit5. Air bag computer6. Instrument panel (depending on version)7. UCH8. Xenon bulb computer9. Parking assistance system computer
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-5
Air bags and seat belt pretensioners
These vehicles are fitted with a passive safety system of the SRP (Renault Protection System) type, comprising:
– a driver's side front air bag system fitted with a SRP 2-volume air bag,– a passenger side front air bag system fitted with a SRP 2-volume air bag,– front and rear pretensioners,– dedicated front seat belts with Renault Protection System,– a computer (75 tracks),– two impact sensors in the B-pillar on each side,– side air bags protecting the thorax of the front seat occupants,– curtain air bags protecting the heads of the front and rear occupants,– side air bags (depending on version) protecting the thorax of the rear seat occupants.
NOTE: Certain connectors are fitted with a new-generation locking system. It is essential to unclip the lock before removing the connector and ensure it is correctly positioned after fitting. An unlocked connector will prevent supply to the igniter line.
IMPORTANT:With this system (front SRP air bags), the seat belts are linked to the air bag function.The Renault Protection System is calibrated differently depending on whether the seat belts are to be fitted in front of an SRP air bag or not (always check the part number for each component before replacement).
On these vehicles, it is strictly forbidden to fit SRP seat belts to a seat not fitted with an air bag, or to disconnect the air bag.
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-6
GENERAL
These safety elements are complementary.
During a front impact of sufficient severity:
! The seat belts restrain the driver and the passengers.! The pretensioners (front and rear) tighten the seat belts against the body.! The Renault Protection System (SRP) limits the force of the seat belt against the body.! The air bags inflate:
– from the centre of the steering wheel to protect the driver's head – from the dashboard to protect the front passenger's head.
NOTE: the front air bags are fitted with two igniters in order to modify the inflation volumes of the bags according to the scale of the impact and the driver's seat position.
All operations on air bag and pretensioner systems must be carried out by qualified trained personnel.
19041
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-7
During a side impact of sufficient severity:
! the front side air bag, located in the corresponding front seat (impact side) deploys on the door side in order to protect the thorax of the front seat occupant.
! Depending on the version, the rear side air bag, located on the vehicle body on the corresponding side (impact side) deploys on the door side in order to protect the thorax of the rear seat occupant.
! The corresponding curtain air bag (impact side) deploys on the door side to protect the heads of the front and rear seat occupants.
IMPORTANT:
– Do not put a cover on the front seats.
– Do not place objects in the air bag deployment area.
– When working on the sill panel of the vehicle (on the side impact sensor, the bodywork, the seat belt inertia reel, etc.), always lock the air bag unit using the diagnostic tool and switch off the ignition.
– For the special requirements of trim removal and refitting operations, always refer to the bodywork section.
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-8
IDENTIFICATION
! Vehicles fitted with front air bags are identified by:– labels located in the lower corners of the
windscreen, on both sides,– by the wording SRP air bag in the centre of the
steering wheel and on the dashboard.
! Vehicles fitted with side air bags are identified by:– labels located in the lower corners of the
windscreen, on both sides,– par the wording Air bag on the side of the front
seatbacks,– by the wording Air bag on the interior trim of the
rear roof pillars.
! Vehicles fitted with rear side air bags are identified by the wording Air bag on the sides of the rear seatback.
PRECAUTIONS
SPECIAL TOOLING
These systems can be diagnosed using the following diagnostic tools:
! NXR! OPTIMA 5800! CLIP
These tools can be used to detect computer faults or faulty system lines (see fault finding section).
NOTE: these tools have an auxiliary function which allows the ignition lines to be disabled before servicing, thus avoiding any risk of activating the pyrotechnic gas generators.
The NXR and CLIP tools also have a step-by-step air bag and pretensioner harness check function similar to that of the XRBAG tool.
! XRBAG (P/N 1288)
This unit is a tool specifically designed for testing and diagnosing air bag and seat belt pretensioner systems.
It allows electrical measurements to be made on the different lines of these systems (see fault finding section).
IMPORTANT: It is vital that pyrotechnic systems (pretensioners, front and side air bags) are checked using the diagnostic tools:– after an accident which has not caused activation,– after theft or attempted theft of the vehicle,– before selling a used vehicle.
IMPORTANT: it is forbidden to make measurements on these systems with an ohmmeter or other electrical measurement device: there is a risk of triggering due to the operating current of the device.
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-9
! 75-TRACK ADAPTER (B53)
This bornier is connected in place of the computer.
In conjunction with the XRBAG, NXR and CLIP tools, it allows all the ignition lines to be checked and the computer supply voltage to be measured.
Terminals also allow the continuity of the diagnostic lines to be checked (see fault finding document).
NOTE: the air bag warning light cannot be controlled by the tool as the illumination request to the instrument panel is made by the multiplex network.
! DUMMY IGNITION MODULE
A dummy ignition module in a small red box is delivered with the XRBAG test kit.
It has the same electrical characteristics as a real ignition module and replaces the air bag cushion or the pretensioner during diagnostic routines.These dummy modules are available from:
MEIGA99-101, route de Versailles CHAMPLAN 91165 LONGJUMEAU CEDEX Tel.: 01 69 10 21 70
15749
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-10
OPERATION OF THE FRONT PRETENSIONERS AND AIR BAGS
After ignition, the air bag and pretensioner warning light comes on for a few seconds and then goes out.
NOTE: the air bag warning light may come on because of low battery voltage.
The computer is then in standby mode and will respond to vehicle decelerations using the signal measured by the integrated electronic decelerometer.
1. During a frontal impact of sufficient severity, the decelerometer triggers simultaneous ignition of the pretensioner gas generators after receiving confirmation of impact detection from the electronic safety sensor:! buckle pretensioner on the driver's seat and
passenger seat,! rear right and left seat belt pretensioners.
2. If the frontal impact is more severe, the decelerometer, following validation of the impact by the electronic safety sensor, triggers ignition of the pyrotechnic gas generators:! buckle pretensioner on the driver's seat and
passenger seat,! right and left rear seat belt pretensioners.! driver's seat lap-belt pretensioner,! driver and front passenger air bags (small volume).
3. If the frontal impact is more severe, the electronic safety unit triggers ignition of the pyrotechnic gas generators of the large-volume driver and passenger frontal air bags.
NOTE: the inflation volume of the driver's air bag may be modified by the computer according to:! the position of the driver's seat (see under-seat
switch) section,! the severity of the impact.
The pyrotechnical buckle pretensioners on the front and rear seats may be triggered during a side or rear impact or overturning of the vehicle (depending on severity).
WARNING: when triggered, a pyrotechnic gas generator produces a detonation and a small amount of smoke.
NOTE: Power supply to the computer and ignition modules is usually from the vehicle battery.Nevertheless, a power reserve capacity is incorporated into the computer in case of battery failure on impact.
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-11
OPERATION OF THE SIDE AIR BAGS
After ignition, the air bag and pretensioner warning light comes on for a few seconds and then goes out.
The computer for the air bag and pretensioner systems is then in standby mode as well as the side air bag impact sensors located on the vehicle's two B-pillars.
On receipt of a side impact of sufficient severity, the impact sensor on the impact side sends a signal to the computer. After receiving confirmation of impact detection from the electronic safety sensor (incorporated in the computer), the computer then triggers ignition of:! the pyrotechnic gas generator of the seat, which
inflates the side air bag of the front seat (impact side), then the front and rear pretensioners,
! the pyrotechnic gas generator of the curtain air bag protecting the heads of the front and rear occupants (impact side),
! the pyrotechnic gas generator (depending on version) of the side air bag of the rear seat (impact side).
The side air bags may be triggered by a violent frontal impact or a violent side impact on the opposite side.
WARNING: when triggered, a pyrotechnic gas generator produces a detonation and a small amount of smoke.
THE COMPUTER
the computer consists of:! an electronic safety sensor for the front air bags and
the pretensioners,! an electronic safety sensor for the side air bags,! an electronic decelerometer for the front air bags and
pretensioners,! connections to the side electronic sensors located in
the B-pillars,! an ignition circuit for the various pyrotechnic
systems,! a power reserve for the various lines,! a fault finding and detected fault memory circuit,! a control circuit for the warning light on the
instrument panel,! a K communication interface via the diagnostic
socket,! an impact detection link (impact information).
IMPORTANT: before removing the computer it is vital that you lock it using one of the fault finding tools. When this function is activated, all the ignition lines are disabled and the air bag warning light on the instrument panel comes on (new computers are delivered in this state).
NOTE: In the event of incorrect operation of these systems during an impact, it is possible to verify that no fault was present before the impact using the diagnostic tools.
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-12
COMPUTER
PROCEDURE FOR LOCKING THE COMPUTER
Before removing the computer or before any operation on the air bag and pretensioner systems, it is vital that you lock the computer:
! using the NXR, OPTIMA 5800 and CLIP tools1. Select the Diagnostic of a Renault vehicle menu.2. Select and confirm the vehicle type.3. Select and validate the system to be diagnosed: Air
bag.4. Choose the Command menu.5. Select and validate the Computer configuration or
Parameterisation function (depending on tool type) and confirm the Lock computer line.
6. Choose the Status menu and verify that the computer is correctly locked. The Computer locked status must be confirmed and the air bag warning light on the instrument panel must be on (new computers are delivered in this state). Fault finding is still possible when this mode is activated.
NOTE: To unlock the computer, use the same method and confirm the Unlock computer line.The Computer unlocked status must no longer be confirmed and the air bag warning light on the instrument panel must go out.
REMOVAL
The computer is located on the tunnel in the central console.
Reminder: a computer must be unlocked using one of the diagnostic tools before it can be removed.
Remove the central console.Cut the carpet at (1) and turn it back slightly.Unclip and remove the right and left air ducts (2).
Disconnect the computer and remove the mounting bolts.
18548
18548-1
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-13
REFITTING
When refitting the computer, ensure that it is fitted the right way up and the right way round. The arrow must point towards the front of the vehicle.
Tighten the bolts to a torque setting of 0.8 daNm.
Configuring the computers
New computers identified as ACU3 by the diagnostic tools (except XR25) are delivered configured as front side air bag, rear side air bag and curtain air bag.If these configurations have not been performed, the air bag warning light will remain on.
! Using the NXR, OPTIMA 5800 and CLIP tools only1. Select the Diagnostic of a Renault vehicle menu.2. Select and confirm the vehicle type.3. Select and validate the system to be diagnosed: Air
bag.4. Choose the Command menu.5. Select and validate the Computer configuration or
Parameterisation function (depending on tool type),6. Confirm the desired configuration line, then press on
next,7. The tool confirms the configuration. Press on next
and confirm,8. Confirm the configuration after switching off the
ignition, using the Command menu, Read configuration.
! The computer contains sensitive components, so it must not be dropped.
! When working under the vehicle (exhaust system, bodywork, etc.), do not use a hammer or transmit impacts to the floor without having locked the computer using the diagnostic tool.
! An electrical aftermarket accessory (speaker, alarm unit or any device which could generate a magnetic field) must not be installed in the immediate vicinity of the air bag/pretensioner computer.
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-14
Connection: yellow 75-track connector
TRACK Description
123456 to 252627282930313233343536373839404142434445464748495051525354555657585960
Not in use+ Buckle pretensioner: driver- Pretensioner: rear left+ Buckle pretensioner: passenger- Pretensioner: rear rightNot in use- Buckle pretensioner: driver- Buckle pretensioner: passenger- Lap-belt pretensioner: driverNot in use+ after ignitionEarthNot in useNot in useK diagnostic line- Air bag: driver, small volume+ Air bag: driver, large volume- Air bag: passenger, small volume+ Air bag: passenger, large volumeNot in useNot in use- Air bag: side, driver+ Air bag: side, passenger- Air bag: curtain, driver+ Air bag: curtain, passenger+ Sensor: side, driver+ Sensor: side, passengerNot in useNot in use- Air bag: rear left side+ Air bag: rear right side+ Pretensioner: rear left- Pretensioner: rear right+ Pretensioner: lap-belt, driver- Air bag: side, passengerNot in useDriver's seat position sensorNot in useMultiplex connectionMultiplex connection+ Air bag: driver, small volume
616263646566676869707172737475
- Air bag: driver, large volume+ Air bag: passenger, small volume- Air bag: passenger, large volumeNot in useNot in use+ Air bag: side, driver- Air bag: side, passenger+ Air bag: curtain, driver- Air bag: curtain, passenger- Sensor: side, driver- Sensor: side, passengerNot in useNot in use+ Air bag: rear left side- Air bag: rear right side
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-15
WARNING LIGHT ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
This warning light verifies correct operation of:! the front and rear pretensioners,! the front air bags,! the seat air bags,! the curtain air bags,! the rear, side air bags (depending on version),! the battery (voltage check).
It must come on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, then go out (and remain off).If it does not come on when the ignition is switched on or if it comes on when the vehicle is in motion, this means there is a fault in the system (see fault finding section).
NOTE: under certain starting conditions, the warning light may come on briefly and then go out.
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-16
SIDE IMPACT SENSORS
IMPORTANTBefore removing a side impact sensor, lock the computer using a diagnostic tool.When this function is activated, all the ignition lines are disabled and the air bag warning light on the instrument panel comes on.
REMOVAL
The sensors are located on both sides, on the B-pillar.
Remove the B-pillar interior trim.
NOTE: it is not necessary to remove the front seat.
Disconnect the rear door connector.
Remove the connector mounting bolts on the B-pillar, then remove the connector.
Remove the sensor mounting bolt then remove the sensor.
19065
18831
WARNING: When a side air bag is triggered, the computer locks permanently and switches on the air bag warning light on the instrument panel. The side impact sensor and the computer must then be replaced (certain components lose their nominal settings after transmission of ignition power).
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-17
IMPORTANT: dismantling the side impact sensor requires destruction of the centring pin. It must be replaced if it is damaged.
REFITTING
To refit it, position the sensor by means of its lug and attach it to the vehicle before reconnecting its connector (tightening torque: 0.8 daNm).
After connecting the connector, check the sensor using the diagnostic tool.
If everything is in order, unlock the computer, otherwise refer to the fault finding section.
NOTE: this type of side impact sensor does not need to be programmed by the diagnostic tool.
Correctly reposition the rear door connector, to prevent water ingress.
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-18
OPERATIONS ON THE IGNITION LINES
If a fault is detected on one of the wiring harness lines, the line must be replaced and not repaired.
This is a safety device and normal repair work on the wiring or connectors is forbidden.
As the ignition wiring for the air bags and pretensioners is incorporated into the passenger compartment wiring harness to facilitate repair, the method of replacing the wires is to cut the ends of the defective wire and to make the new wire follow the same routing by running it alongside the passenger compartment wiring harness.
WARNING: when fitting the new wiring, make sure that it is not chafing and that its original cleanliness is maintained.
WARNING: when installing electrical accessories, avoid routing their electrical wiring close to the side sensors and the air bag and pretensioner ignition lines.
UNDER-SEAT SWITCH
The driver's seat is fitted with a runner position sensor.
This allows the level of inflation of the driver's frontal air bag to be modified (small or large volume) depending on the position of the driver and the severity of the impact.
To replace it, remove the seat then connect the new switch using heatshrink sleeves, or replace the complete wiring.
Always check operation of the switch after an impact which has caused triggering of one or more air bags.
18631
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-19
THE SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS
Description
The vehicles are fitted with several models of seat belt pretensioner.! Buckle pretensioners on each front seat belt. These
are mounted on the side of the front seats.! A lap-belt pretensioner on the driver's seat.! Inertia reel pretensioners on the rear seat belts
(except central belt).
! Front pretensioners (buckle or lap-belt)
A pretensioner consists of:– a specific seat belt catch (A),– a pyrotechnic gas generator with its ignition
module (B).
The components of the pretensioner cannot be separated.
NOTE: this system becomes operational when the ignition is switched on.
When it is triggered, the system is able to retract the seat belt catch by up to 70 mm (maximum)
NOTE: On vehicles fitted with side air bags it is not possible to display the resistance of the seat belt pretensioners using the fault finding tool. To perform this measurement, use the XRBAG, NXR or CLIP tools (wiring check).
18628-1
DI18801R
DI18802
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-20
REMOVAL
Undo the seat belt by pressing the lock (1).
Position the seat in the low position and middle setting, then remove it using tool Elé. 1584 (depending on version).
After removing the seat, remove:– the pretensioner connector located under the front
seat,– the earth wire,– the pretensioner assembly, after removing the
protective trim.
REMINDER: During seat belt pretensioner or air bag triggering, the computer is locked definitively and lights up the air bag warning light on the instrument panel. The computer must be replaced (certain components lose their nominal settings after transmission of ignition power).
WARNING: it is forbidden to handle the pyrotechnic systems (pretensioner or air bag) near a flame or heat source (risk of ignition).
IMPORTANT: Before removing a pretensioner, lock the computer using the diagnostic tool. When this function is activated, all the ignition lines are disabled and the air bag warning light on the instrument panel comes on.
18828
WARNING: Take care when removing a seat not to unhook the connector so as not to generate static electricity; this could trigger the air bag.
19072
IMPORTANT: refer to the Destruction procedure section for notes on scrapping an untriggered pretensioner.
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-21
Special notes
The seat belt catch on the driver's side has an electrical contact which operates a warning light on the instrument panel to indicate that the belt is not fastened.
To unclip the connector, remove the mounting bolts of the two buckle half-shells.
REFITTING
Observe correct routing of the wiring and the wiring mounting points under the seat.
Before removing the seat, visually check the condition of the connectors on the seat base and the vehicle body.
After replacing faulty parts and reconnecting the connectors, carry out a check using the diagnostic tool.If everything is in order, unlock the computer, otherwise refer to the fault finding section.
18629
19107
18630
18829
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-22
! Rear pretensioners
The pretensioner is located on the inertia reel. To remove it, it is necessary to remove the luggage compartment and quarter panel trim. Refer to the method described in the bodywork section.
Disconnect the connector and earth wire and remove the mounting bolt.
REFITTING
Ensure that the wiring is correctly routed using the wiring attachment points.
Tighten the mounting bolt to a torque setting of 2.1 daNm. (Ø 10 mm) or 4.4 daNm. (Ø 12 mm).
After replacing faulty parts and reconnecting the connectors, carry out a check using the diagnostic tool.If everything is in order, unlock the computer, otherwise refer to the fault finding section.
18547
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-23
SRP SEAT BELTS
The front seat belts are fitted with a special Renault Protection System (SRP).
With this system, the seat belts are linked to the air bag function (its Renault Protection System is not calibrated in the same way as an air bag, whether SRP or not).
After triggering of a pretensioner, the front seat belt(s) must always be replaced if they were fastened during the pretensioning operation (if there is any doubt about whether the seat belt was being worn or not, it must be replaced). The physical loads exerted on the buckle are also applied to the inertia reel and may damage its mechanism.
DRIVER'S AIR BAG
The driver’s air bag is fitted with a specific inflatable bag (cushion with SRP marking). The bag can be inflated in two ways (small or large volume) depending on the severity of the impact and the position of the driver's seat.
With this system, the air bag is linked to the seat belt opposite it.The Renault Protection System for the seat belt is calibrated specifically and is complementary to this type of air bag cushion.
Description
It is located in the steering wheel cushion.
It comprises:– a 2-volume inflatable bag,– a pyrotechnic gas generator with its two ignition
modules.These components cannot be separated.
When triggered, the inflatable bag deploys by bursting through the steering wheel cover.
NOTE: this system becomes operational when the ignition is switched on.
IMPORTANT: always replace the steering wheel and its mounting bolt if the air bag has triggered.
18994
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-24
REMOVAL
– insert a screwdriver (type T30) or a ∅ 6 mm rod into the hole (1) located behind the steering wheel,
– raise (2) the air bag in order to slide it out,– unclip the connector safety clips,– disconnect the two generator power supply
connectors.
REFITTING– connect the earth wire,– position the two connectors and lock the safety clips,– position the cushion on the steering wheel,– slide it backwards in order to clip it in place.
WARNING: it is forbidden to handle the pyrotechnic systems (pretensioner or air bag) near a flame or heat source (risk of ignition).
IMPORTANT: before removing an air bag cushion, lock the computer using a diagnostic tool. When this function is activated, all the ignition lines are disabled and the air bag warning light on the instrument panel comes on.
IMPORTANT: whenever the steering wheel is removed, it is essential to disconnect the air bag connectors (A) and (B). The air bag is fitted with a connector which is short circuited when it is disconnected, to prevent accidental triggering.
18455
IMPORTANT: refer to the Destruction procedure section for notes on scrapping an untriggered air bag cushion.
REMINDER: During seat belt pretensioner or air bag triggering, the computer is locked definitively and lights up the air bag warning light on the instrument panel. The computer must be replaced (certain components lose their nominal settings after transmission of ignition power).
IMPORTANT: After refitting everything, carry out a check using the diagnostic tool.If everything is in order, unlock the computer, otherwise refer to the Fault finding section.
18554
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-25
PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
The passenger air bag (SRP) is fitted with a 2-volume inflatable bag.
With this system, the air bag is linked to the seat belt opposite it.The Renault Protection System for the seat belt is calibrated specifically and is complementary to this type of air bag cushion.
Description
It is mounted in the dashboard opposite the front passenger. It comprises:– a 2-volume inflatable bag,– a non-separable pyrotechnic gas generator with its
two ignition modules.
NOTE: this system becomes operational when the ignition is switched on.
REMOVAL
To remove the passenger air bag module it is necessary to remove the dashboard. To do this, refer to the method described in section 83.
Remove the two ignition module connectors and the mounting bolts.
18539
WARNING: it is forbidden to handle the pyrotechnic systems (pretensioner or air bag) near a flame or heat source (risk of ignition).
IMPORTANT: before removing a passenger air bag module, lock the computer using a diagnostic tool. When this function is activated, all the ignition lines are disabled and the air bag warning light on the instrument panel comes on.
IMPORTANT: When the passenger air bag is triggered, the consequent deformation and damage caused to the attachments always requires replacement of the dashboard. Do not forget to attach the label forbidding installation of a backwards facing child seat on the side of the new dashboard (label available in a set, PN: 77 01 205 442).
IMPORTANT: refer to the Destruction procedure section for notes on scrapping an untriggered air bag cushion.
REMINDER: During seat belt pretensioner or air bag triggering, the computer is locked definitively and lights up the air bag warning light on the instrument panel. The computer must be replaced (certain components lose their nominal settings after transmission of ignition power).
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-26
REFITTING
Carry out the refitting operation in the reverse order of removal, observing the correct torque values when tightening the module attachments.
Replace the retaining clip (2) of the passenger air bag module.
Check the module using the diagnostic tool.If everything is in order, unlock the computer; otherwise, refer to the fault finding section.
Ignition module accessibility
it is possible to access the ignition module (2-volume) or intermediate connector (1) of the passenger air bag module for fault finding purposes, via the glove compartment.
Remove the glove compartment cover, the connector is located on the right hand side of the dashboard (near the options fuse and relay box).
REMINDER: the module igniter must be tested using the diagnostic tool and the XRBAG tool, as described in the fault finding section.
WARNING: You MUST follow the safety instructions when removing or replacing the passenger air bag module. If these instructions are not followed, the system may fail to operate normally and could even be dangerous to the occupants of the vehicle.
IMPORTANT:
! Check for foreign bodies (bolts, clips, etc.) when fitting the air bag module.
! The module tightening torque is 0.2 daNm.
! On the module side, make sure the connector is properly clipped (powerful clip) and locate the safety lock.
! Attach a blue tamper-prevention adhesive label, PN 77 01 040 153 (other vehicles).
18546
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-27
THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE (FRONT)
Description
The side air bag module is attached to the back of the front seats on the door side.
It comprises:– an inflatable bag,– a pyrotechnic gas generator with its non-separable
ignition module.
The air bag bursts through the foam and detaches the trim when it deploys.
NOTE: this system becomes operational when the ignition is switched on.
REMOVAL
IMPORTANT: Before working on a seatback or removing a seat fitted with a side air bag, lock the computer using the diagnostic tool. When this function is activated, all the ignition lines are disabled and the air bag warning light on the instrument panel comes on.
WARNING: To work on a seat fitted with an air bag, and in order to ensure the latter's correct deployment, it is essential to follow the instructions described in the Bodywork section (position, number and type of clips to be used, etc.).
! Disconnect the battery.
! Remove the seat from the vehicle using the tool Elé. 1584 tool and remove the seatback trim. Refer to the method described in the bodywork section.
! Release the air bag module wiring and its earth wire after disconnecting its connector (mark the routing of the wiring and its attachment points).
IMPORTANT: if the system has not been triggered, and is to be refitted, do not open the air bag module. The air bag cushion must be folded in a special way.
15132R
WARNING: it is forbidden to handle the pyrotechnic systems (pretensioner or air bag) near a flame or heat source (risk of ignition).
WARNING: Take care when removing a seat not to unhook the connector so as not to create static electricity; this could trigger the air bag.
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-28
Remove the attachment rivet (1) then slide the cushion out.
REFITTING
! position the air bag module on the frame,
! position the attachment rivet (1) delivered with the module,
! ensure that the earth wire is correctly connected to the air bag module (depending on version),
! position the wiring under the seat cushion as it was originally, observing its routing and attachment points,
! reconnect the earth wire and verify that the connector is locked in position,
! replace the seat trim, observing strictly the recommendations given in the bodywork section (type of clip, clip location, etc.),
! refit the seat to the vehicle and reconnect its connectors. Refer to the method described in the bodywork section,
! Check the module using the diagnostic tool.If everything is in order, unlock the computer; otherwise, refer to the fault finding section.
19105
IMPORTANT: refer to the Destruction procedure section for notes on scrapping an untriggered side air bag.
REMINDER: During seat belt pretensioner or air bag triggering, the computer is locked definitively and lights up the air bag warning light on the instrument panel. The computer and the side impact sensor must then be replaced (certain components lose their nominal settings after transmission of ignition power).
WARNING: when a side air bag is triggered, the consequent deformation and damage caused to the attachments always requires replacement of the seat frame.
19102
WARNING: If these instructions are not followed the system may not operate normally and could even cause accidental triggering.
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-29
SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
Description
the side curtain air bag or head air bag module is attached behind the headlining.
It comprises:– an inflatable cushion in the form of a curtain,– a pyrotechnic gas generator with its ignition module
(located at the back). These components cannot be separated.
The air bag detaches the headlining when it deploys.
NOTE: this system becomes operational when the ignition is switched on.
REMOVAL
IMPORTANT: before removing or working on a curtain air bag, lock the computer using the diagnostic tool. When this function is activated, all the ignition lines are disabled and the air bag warning light on the instrument panel comes on.
Special features of the saloon version:
! access to the gas generator (1) requires removal of the rear trim,
! removal of the air bag module (2) and the inflatable cushion requires removal of the headlining.
WARNING: it is forbidden to handle the pyrotechnic systems (pretensioner or air bag) near a flame or heat source (risk of ignition). 18547
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-30
Special features of the estate version:
! access to the gas generator (1) and replacement of the air bag module (2) requires removal of the headlining,
! release the air bag module wiring and its earth wire after disconnecting its connector.
IMPORTANT: if the system has not been triggered, and is to be refitted, do not open the air bag module. The air bag cushion must be folded in a special way.
! Remove the air bag assembly.
REFITTING
! Position the air bag module without tightening the mounting bolts.
! Position the air bag cushion starting with retainer (1).
! Position all the clips.
! Tighten the mounting bolts (2) to a torque setting of 0.8 daNm).
! Reconnect the earth wire (E) (depending on version).
! Reconnect the connector, ensuring the locking clip is correctly located.
! Carry out a test using the diagnostic tool. If everything is in order, unlock the computer, otherwise refer to the fault finding section.
WARNING: If these instructions are not followed the system may not operate normally and could even cause accidental triggering.
IMPORTANT: refer to the Destruction procedure section for notes on scrapping an untriggered side air bag.
REMINDER: During seat belt pretensioner or air bag triggering, the computer is locked definitively and lights up the air bag warning light on the instrument panel. The computer and side impact sensor must then be replaced (certain components lose their nominal settings after transmission of ignition power).
WARNING: when a side air bag module is triggered, the consequent deformation and damage caused to the attachments always requires replacement of the mounting clips.
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-31
SIDE AIR BAG MODULE (REAR)
Description
The rear side air bag module (1) is attached behind the trim alongside the rear seat cushion.
It comprises:– an inflatable cushion in the form of a curtain,– a pyrotechnic gas generator with its non-separable
ignition module.
When triggered, the inflatable bag deploys by bursting through the module cover.
NOTE: this system becomes operational when the ignition is switched on.
REMOVAL
IMPORTANT: Before removing or working on a rear side air bag, lock the computer using the diagnostic tool. When this function is activated, all the ignition lines are disabled and the air bag warning light on the instrument panel comes on.
! fold down the back of the rear seat then unclip the trim,
! release the air bag module wiring and its earth wire after disconnecting its connector.
! remove the air bag cushion from its two attachments.
18547
WARNING: it is forbidden to handle the pyrotechnic systems (pretensioner or air bag) near a flame or heat source (risk of ignition).
18547
IMPORTANT: refer to the Destruction procedure section for notes on scrapping an untriggered side air bag.
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-32
REFITTING
! attach the air bag module (tightening torque: 0.8 daN.m),
! ensure that the earth wire is correctly connected to the air bag module,
! reposition the earth wire (E), observing its routing and attachment points and reconnect it. Verify that connector is locked correctly.
! Perform a test using the diagnostic tool.If everything is in order, unlock the computer; otherwise, refer to the fault finding section.
WARNING: If these instructions are not followed the system may not operate normally and could even cause accidental triggering.
18547
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-33
DESTRUCTION PROCEDURE
To avoid all possible risk of an accident the pyrotechnic gas generators in the air bags and seat belt pretensioners must be triggered before the vehicle or the individual part is scrapped.
WARNING: the front air bags have two independent ignition modules.
Tool Elé. 1287 and adapter leads Elé. 1287-01 and Elé. 1287-02 must be used.
WARNING: This does not apply if local legislation requires a specific procedure validated and circulated by the Methods, Fault Finding and Repair service.
96832R
IMPORTANT: Do not reuse the pyrotechnic components as replacement parts. The pretensioners or air bags on a vehicle which are to be scrapped must always be completely destroyed.
WARNING: Do not trigger pretensioners which are to be returned under warranty in respect of a problem on the seat belt catch. This makes analysis of the part by the supplier impossible. Return the part in the packaging of the new part.
REMINDER: each part is specific to a vehicle type and must never be fitted to another vehicle type. The parts are not interchangeable.
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-34
! PRETENSIONERS
Destruction of the part when fitted to the vehicle:
Move the vehicle outside the workshop.
Connect the destruction tool to the pretensioner after removing the seat runner cover.
Unwind all the tool wiring so that it is far enough away from the vehicle (approx. 10 metres) during triggering.
Connect the two supply wires on the tool to a battery.
After checking that there is no-one nearby, destroy the pretensioner by pressing the two buttons on the tool at the same time.
Note: if triggering is impossible (faulty ignition module), return the part, in the packaging of the replacement part, to ITG (0429 department).
Destruction of the part when removed from the vehicle:
Proceed in the same way as for the driver's air bag, inside a pile of old tyres (see below).
! FRONTAL AIR BAG OR SIDE AIR BAG (front or rear)
The part must be removed from the vehicle for destruction.
Carry out the operation outside the workshop.
After connecting the appropriate wiring, set the air bag cushion on two blocks of wood to avoid damaging the connector against the ground.
WARNING: Do not trigger pretensioners which are to be returned under warranty in respect of a problem on the seat belt catch. This makes analysis of the part by the supplier impossible. Return the part in the packaging of the new part.
96438
96834S
WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88WIRINGAir bags and seat belt pretensioners 88
88-35
Cover the assembly with a stack of four old tyres.
Unwind all the tool wiring so that it is far enough away from the unit (approx. 10 metres) during triggering and connect it to the air bag cushion.
Connect the two supply wires on the tool to a battery.
After checking that there is no-one nearby, destroy the air bag by pressing the two buttons on the tool at the same time.
Note: if triggering is impossible (faulty ignition module), return the part in the packaging of the replacement part to the warranty department.
WARNING: the front air bags have two independent ignition modules.Ensure that both ignition modules have been triggered before scrapping them.
! CURTAIN AIR BAG
Destruction of the curtain air bag is carried out removed from the vehicle in order not to damage the attachments.
Position the module in a vice, attachments underneath. The vice must be correctly attached to the bench, which must be embedded in the floor and clear of any other tool.
Make sure that deployment of the inflatable cushion will not be hindered.
Connect the destruction tool to the curtain air bag.
Unwind all the tool wiring so that it is far enough away from the vehicle (approx. 10 metres) during triggering.
Connect the two supply wires on the tool to a battery.
After checking that there is no-one nearby, destroy the air bag by pressing the two buttons on the tool at the same time.
96835S
WIRINGAutomatic seat connector 88WIRINGAutomatic seat connector 88WIRINGAutomatic seat connector 88WIRINGAutomatic seat connector 88WIRINGAutomatic seat connector 88WIRINGAutomatic seat connector 88WIRINGAutomatic seat connector 88WIRINGAutomatic seat connector 88WIRINGAutomatic seat connector 88
88-36
Automatic seat connector
AUTOMATIC SEAT CONNECTOR CONNECTION (fullest version)
18829
18630
TRACK Description
1234567891011
12131415
16171819202122232425262728
Power supply to electric seatSeat belt warning light (driver)Power supply to heated seatUnder-seat lightingEarthNot in useLap-belt pretensioner (driver)Buckle pretensionerSeat position sensor (driver)Memory signal (driver)Seat with position memory power supply (driver)Not in useEarthSide air bagSeat with position memory power supply (driver)Heated seat warning lightPower supply to electric seatUnder-seat lightingNot in useNot in useLap-belt pretensioner (driver)Buckle pretensionerEarthMemory signal (driver)Not in useNot in useNot in useSide air bag
WARNING: Take care when removing a seat not to unhook the connector so as not to create static electricity; this could trigger the air bag.
WIRINGHeadlining connector 88WIRINGHeadlining connector 88WIRINGHeadlining connector 88WIRINGHeadlining connector 88WIRINGHeadlining connector 88WIRINGHeadlining connector 88WIRINGHeadlining connector 88WIRINGHeadlining connector 88WIRINGHeadlining connector 88Headlining connector
The headlining is not glued to the vehicle. It is held in place by the door seals, the sun visor and the grab handles (use tool Car. 1597).
It is possible to replace the headlining and keep the harness or replace the harness and keep the headlining.
REMOVAL
The harness is glued to the headlining. To remove it, heat the glue using a hot air gun, then cut the glue bead taking care not to damage the harness.
It is also possible to leave the faulty harness in place, and to glue the new harness alongside it.
REFITTING
When refitting the harness on the headlining, it is essential to observe the location of the connectors with respect to the edge of the headlining. A mark on the harness must coincide with the edge of the headlining.
Special features of the hands-free aerial
The hands-free aerial is glued to the headlining. It can be replaced on its own.
18550
18870 18827
88-37